The Great Battles of the Napoleonic ~rs in Miniature

WarWeb.com
All Your Wargame eeds from One Store
Purchase at our secure Web site: Warweb.com
Best Source for a oleonic Miniatures
Large inventory and great service
Historical Miniatures from:
Baker Com an
Dixon
Menimack Pe a 0

Thorou bred West Wind

UI lngs rom:
Architectural Heritage . GHQ Hudson and Allen
JR Miniatures IT Miniatures Old Glory

Large selection of rules and board games

Military Books from Greenhill, Osprey, Stackpole, etc.

Also Vallejo Paints, Brushes, Dice, Wargame Accessories, Signifier

Flags, Veni Vici Shield Decals and much more

WarWeb.com
Grandiosity Inc.
P.o. Box 750992
Dayton Ohio 45475-0992
Phone: 937-439-2488
Fax: 937-291-9373
(Store Location: 240 We t Elmwood # 1015 Centerville OR 45459)
Grande A,omee is a set of rules by which players can use miniature figures of any size or basing system to recreate the
famous, large-scale battles of the Napoleonic wars. In wargame parlance, it is "grand-tactical" in scope, in that players
command entire annies, moving whole corps and divisions on the table. The basic unit on the table-top is the brigade,
representing a few thousand soldiers. At this scale, of course, many things are ab tracted. We do not concern ourselves
with the actions of small groups of soldiers. Rather, we place ourselves in the roles of general, ordering thousands of
men to move, attack, or defend. And, like tho e general of history, we don't know whether or not our officers and men
are going to behave exactly as we hope or expect.
For maximum clarity, these rules are written in the order of the game's sequence of play. Whenever a new game
tenn or concept is introduced, it will be written for the first time in bold type. In some cases, when the "why" of a rule
would aid in comprehension, I have included a separate discu sion in an offset box. Each chapter is identified by a let-
ter, and each rule within that chapter by a number, so that players can quickly reference specific rules, such as: "D2.1."
After you have read the book all the way through, I have included a very brief, condensed version of the game in a
section called Eclaireur. (This was the French word for "scout," and in this four-page section you can quickly find the
information you need, without having to re-read entire chapters.) And finally, I have included an even more condensed
set of information - only the most frequently-used charts and tables - on cardstock, which you can affix to the edges
of your gaming table for quick reference.
Grande Annee does not follow a perfectly linear sequence of play. One sub-system in the rules relates to another,
which affects another, and so on. So it might be useful to make a copy of the sequence of play (found in :Eclaireur or on
page 8), and have it beside you as you read through this book for the first time.

This is the second printing. including errata. Differencesfrom the first printing are marked with the _ symbol.

Grande Annee is a registered U.S. Trademark name for the game of the great battles of the Napoleonic wars in minia-
ture. All material found herein is Copyright 2002 by Sam A. Mustafa. Except where explicitly noted, no part of this book
may be reproduced or transmitted in any fonn by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or oth-
erwise. All Rights Reserved.

Grande A rmee on the Web: www.sammustafa.comjgrandearmee.html

Aclmowledgements
Grande Armee is published by Quantum Printing, 460 W. 34th Street, New York, NY 10001.
During the two years of its development, Grande Armee benefited greatly from the advice and counsel of
several "blind playtesters" who played the game without my presence:
In the United States, myoId friends and grognards Frank Buehren, Jr., Kevin Garber, Andrew Franke, and
their respective gaming clubs.
In Canada, Marc Rivet, who designed and playtested the Austerlitz scenario with his club. (This scenario is
available on the Grande Armee website. You can ask him how to spell "pzrbitschevsky.")
In Britain, Ian Wilson and Mark Urban provided much useful advice and counsel.
My own playtests were done with the Jersey Area Garners (JAG), and at the bunker-like headquarters of
the New York Wargamers Association (NYWA). I want to thank Dave Waxtel for inviting me to come teach
my game to these excellent players, who made a number of suggestions and refinements. In particular, I
thank Dino Diakolios, who scrutinized endless charts and tables, and did more than anyone to sharpen the
game's mechanics.

Artistic Credits
The photographs were taken by Mark Mosrie in Knoxville, TN. (Photomoz@aol.com)
The line drawings were done by my wife, Theresa, who has been known to pick up a paintbrush from time
to time. Graphic design, computer art, and page layout were done by me.
Most of the 2smm figures appearing in the pictures were painted by me, but a substantial number of the
2smm Austrian figures were painted by DJD Miniatures, an excellent painting service and online store.
For more information, contact John Covello at www.djdminis.com. John and his crew are fast, reason-
ably priced, and even send a digital photograph of the finished figures for your inspection, prior to com-
pleting the transaction.
The Ismm figures in the photographs were loaned to me by Craig Tyrell, who has recently taken over the
legendary "Mr. GAJO" painting service, now well into its second decade. GAJO has been providing fast,
reliable service to wargamers for so long it's hard to imagine the hobby without him: GAJO Enterprises,
8547 Senda Circle, Sandy, UT 84093. Email: gajominis@aol.com.

About the Author:

Sam A Mustafa is a professor of European history at Ramapo College of New
Jersey, where he teaches a course called "The Age of Napoleon." He became fas-
cinated by military history and wargames when he was a child, but didn't discov-
er miniatures until his early twenties. He hastily painted a handful of Napoleonic
Prussians and took them off to a local game. He 10 t. (Badly.) But it was the
beginning of a long love of the artistry, history, and fun of miniature wargaming.
Sam Mustafa has published one book and a number of historical articles. His
previous game designs include Battlegroup, Sabres, Usuthu!, The Spirit oj '76,
Monarch, Firelock, Myght and Magick, Comrades, and 1914. He lives in the New
York City area. He sold tho e Prussians, by the way.
Table of Contents
A. Setting up for Play 2 The Scenarios:
B. Playing the Game 8 Fuentes de Onoro 62
C. Weather 10 Aspern-Essling 67
D. The Command Phase 12 Friedland 75
E. Skirmishing 14 Waterloo 82
F. Artillery Fire 17
G. The Control Segment 20 Appendix One: Scales and Concepts 92
H. Movement 28 Appendix Two: Officer Listings 96
I. Combat 37 Appendix Three: Unit Type Listings 101
J. Things Fall Apart 44
K. The Rally Segment 47 Eclaireur 107
L. Victory 49
M. Special Cases 54
N. Optional Rules 58
 A. Setting up for Play
1.0 E quipment Needed for Play
To play Grande Annee, you will need the following:
it Six-sided dice. Having them in two different col-
ors can be very useful. Also, each army com-
mander should have a clear jar, with two white
dice and one colored die. These are used for many
rolls the army commanders must make.
it Tape measures.
it Cardboard chits labeled "CP." A sheet of these has
been provided; players should photocopy them to
cardboard and cut them out. There should be a
supply of about 100 of them on hand. These rep-
resent "Command Points," and the players will
spend them during the course of the game.
it Two plastic cups. Any small, opaque containers
will do. They will hold each player's stash of CP
chits, out of sight of his opponent.
it Some kind of markers to show broken units. For
aesthetic purposes, the best thing is to paint some
casualty figures, and mount them on small bases.
But any sort of marker will do; poker chips, for
instance, can fit the bill.
it Rosters on which to mark hits for all the units in
a game. If playing a cenario included in this
book, these have already been provided for you;
simply photocopy them and use on a clipboard
with a pencil.
it Puffs of cotton serve nicely to designate which
units have fired. They can also be used to mark an
artillery unit which has been suppressed.
Casualty figures, CP chits, and the "dice jar" with two
white dice and one colored die.
The general idea is to keep the playing surface as pret-
ty as possible by not having extraneous things on it,
such as cardboard counters, pens or pencils, or even
the dice.
If you intend to play multiple-day battles or cam-
paigns, you will also need an area set aside for keeping
the units which have routed during the game, since
these mayor may not recover and "come back" after
the day of battle.
2.0 Basing Infantry and Cavalry
Grande Armee u es standard base izes for all units of
a certain type. All infantry and all cavalry units are
mounted on 3" square base . Artillery units and offi-
cers are based differently, as will be explained later.
A base of infantry or cavalry represents a brigade,
or a grouping of several battalions or quadrons. There
are, however, no rules for how many miniatures need
to be mounted on tho e base. You can choose any size
and number of figures you like. We do away with the
notion that one figure represents any particular num-
ber of soldiers; it is the size of the base that matters.
2.1 Unit Labels
Each infantry, cavalry, and artillery unit must have a
unit label. These are pre-printed for you in the scenar-
ios that come with this book.
Artillery unit lab els need only to convey the
identity of the Force to which this artillery belongs (II
Corps, for instance), the size (in "poundage"), and type
(Foot or Horse) of artillery it represents:
IIV: 6-pdr Horse I
Infantry and Ca valry unit labels should include
the following information, in this order:
it Force / Divisional/Unit identity, as appropriate,
such as: 11/1/2 (II corps, 1st division, 2nd
brigade)
it The name of the brigadier, or some identifying
characteristic of the unit, such as "Dragoons"
it Skirmish value (8 K). If the unit has a skirmish
value of zero, nothing will appear here.
it Mixed Brigade (MX). If the unit is a mixed
brigade (an infantry unit with some cavalry
attached), then the MX designation will appear
last on the label.
I11/1/2 Bourcier SK2 MX
I IC/1/2 Cuirassiers
 Setting up for Play"
2.2 Figures Based for Other Garnes
o you already have a large collection of miniatures for
the Napoleonic wars, probably ba ed to a different sys-
tem? Don't panic. No re-basing is required.
You will need to make some movement trays for
Grande Armee. These are simply 3" squares of some-
thing (cardboard, plastic, metal, whatever), spray-
painted green. (Green cardboard framing matte works
nicely; it is cheap, easy to cut, and can be bought in any
color.)
3.0 Basing Artillery Units
An artillery unit should be mounted on a base 1.5" wide
and 3" deep. (Optionally, Russian batteries may be
based 2" wide and 3" deep, if players agree.)
In most armies, the uniforms of foot gunners were
distinctive from horse gunners, but in case there is any
confusion, the unit s label should also read "Foot" or
"Horse." Players should mount a single lsmm or
25mm gun on a base, with 2-3 crew figures. When
using 6mm figures, mount 2-3 guns, served by as many
crew as you like.
4.0 Using the Unit Rosters
In order to keep track of information about your units,
and to conceal that information from the enemy,
Grande Armee uses "ro ters." The rosters that come
with the four scenarios in this book can be photocopied
and kept on a clipboard.
On the rosters, each unit has its identification
(which matches the I.D. on its base), such as III/10/l
(III Corps, 10th Division, 1st Brigade). Next is either
the name of the brigadier or some description of the
troop-type (or both). Then the Morale class of the
unit is listed. There are six possible classes ranging in
quality: Guard, Elite, Veteran, Trained, Conscript, and
Raw. And finally the unit's Strength Points (SP ).
Here we see Grande Annee infantry units in 2 5mm, 15mm,
and 6mm. The smallest figures allow for a kind of panoramic
effect, showing the different battalions deployed, with skir-
mishers in front.
The 15mm Spaniards, in the middle, are mounted for
another popular game system, and have simply been placed
on top of a 3" square base to use in Grande Annee.
Those I 5mm figures were loaned to me by the excellent
" M r. GAlO" painting service. For more information, contact
Craig Tyrell at: GAlO Enterprises, 8 547 Senda Circle,
Sandy, UT 84093. Email: gajominis@aol.com .
Artillery units have only their I.D. and type, since
all artillery have two SPs.
Following this information is a long blank line,
onto which players will mark changes in the unit's sta-
tus as the game progresse . As a result of artillery fire,
combat, and other things, units will take Hits. Each
hit reduces the unit's SPs by one. As the unit takes hits,
mark its remaining SP on the line. When a unit's SPs
have been reduced to zero, it Breaks.
Use this line also to write an "R" (for 'routing') if a
unit breaks. If it Rallies , draw a circle around the R to
show that it has rallied. (It is important to keep track
of how many times a unit has broken and rallied.)
It is best not to erase number on the roster, but
simply to keep adding new numbers, with the most
recent number showing the unit's current status. This
can avoid confusion and arguments, and can serve to
confirm any disputes about a unit's condition, if neces-
sary.
See an example of a roster, on the following page.
 Setting up for Play

Unit Labels and Rosters

1st Division: pencer 2/7"
III Stoprord (Guards) Guards 9SP ~ 6
In Nightingale Elite 6SP II R
1/3 Howard Elite 7 P 5 ;, :2 (R) ~
1/4 Von Uiwe (KGL) Veteran SSP

On the left Is a typical inrantry unit, showing its label. Above,

we see a sample from a roster (in this case, from the British at
Fuentes de Oi'\oro.) Notice how, as the unit loses strength, you
write the new level of SPs on the roster, never erasing the pre-
vious number.
When the unit's SPs reach zero, mark the roster with an R,
for "routed." If the unit later rallies, then circle that R, and
write the new, rallied strength.
In this manner, SPs can wax and wane, with the roster serv-
ing as a record for each unit.
In the above example, Nightingale's brigade has routed,
but not rallied, while Howard's brigade routed, but rallied, and
now has 3 SPs.

5.0 The Two Kinds of Armies Here is an example of a Napoleonic army. There are three
army corps, each with three divisions:
For over a century, large armies had been organized
into sub-groupings only on the eve of a campaign or
battle. The units were then divided up amongst the
most senior commanders, hence the term "divi ions."
Therefore, the traditional European army had an army
commander, and then a number of divisions, varying
greatly in composition. Sometimes, in very large
armies, these divisions would be apportioned among
senior commanders as "wings" or "columns." The
French introduced a new system of army corps (corps
d'armee), which were permanent sub-groupings of a Here is an example of a Traditional army, with five divisions.
few divisions each: miniature armies which could fight The divisions are likely larger (containing more units) than a
on their own if necessary. Officers and staff were more division in a Napoleonic army:
or less permanently attached to each other, and
learned to work together more harmoniously. This sys-
tem was such an obvious improvement that by 1810
virtually all the major belligerents had adopted it.
(Britain was a notable exception.)
There are two kinds of armies that you might
encounter in the game. A Napoleonic Arm y uses the
corps system, as perfected by Napoleon, and later
adopted by mo t others. A Traditiona l Arm y bas an
army commander, and then a number of large divi-
sions.
 Setting upfor Play e
The three types of officers: O n the left is an Army Commander (BlOcher, with Gneisenau and MOffling). In the center is a
SubCommander (the incom parablydressed Joachim Murat). And on the right a General (in this case, Grouchy - note the
handwrinen label, because he was deployed during the game.)
6.0 Officers on the Tabletop
In Grande Armee, all of the command figures are col-
lectively called Officers. Officer figures represent a
leader and his headquarters staff.
Due to the differences in language, national sys-
tems, and ranks, Grande Armee u es its own generic
terms for the different levels of command figure . Each
side has an overall army commander, known hereafter
as simply the Commander. Beneath him are the
Sub-commander , each of whom leads a Fo rce of
the army. Finally, under certain circumstances a play-
er can deploy Generals, who represent a lower rank
offield command: leaders of divisions, aides-de-camp,
artillery officers, etc.
For 2smmfigures:
The Commander should be mounted on a 3" square base, and
hould be surrounded by at least two aide .
A Sub-commander should be mounted on a 2 square ba e,
with one aide.
A General is mounted by himself on a 11/2" square base.
For .1smm figures:
The Commander should be mounted on a 2" square base, and
should be surrounded by at least two aide .
A Sub-commander should be mounted on a 1 1/2 square 6.2 Sub-Commanders and Forces
base, with one aide.
A General is mounted by himself on a 1" quare base.
For 6mm figures, use the lsmm base sizes, but feel free
to add more figures to the bases to give them a better
dioramic effect.
6.1 Officers' Labels
Officers should have labels on their bases. In addition
to the officer's name and command, there are ratings
listed on the label. The army commander has a one-
word rating called his Skill. Thi can be, from best to
worst: Great, Good, Average, or Poor. A sub-com-
mander will have a one-digit number, called his
Control Numbe r . He will then have a Radiu ,
expressed as a number of inches. He might also have
any of the following: a (V) designating that he gives a
bonus for Valor; and/or a P e r s onality rating
expressed as either "Aggressive" or "Cautious." For
example:
I Lanoe (V) 1 / 16 "
I Bernadotte 4 / Cautious I
12 "
I Ney (V) 3/ 4 " Aggre sive
1
Valor bonus 7
Control Number
f RadIus Personality
(not all officers have
a note here.)
An army usually has several sub-commanders. A sub-
commander commands a large body of units, which we
call his Force (always capitalized). In a Napoleonic
army, for instance, a Force would usually be a corp . In
a Traditional army, a Force would probably be a large
division.
 " setting upfor Play
The Napoleonic system was an improvement over the
Traditional system in many ways. In game terms, we
represent the increased flexibility of the Napoleonic
system by allowing Napoleonic armies to create
Detachme nts and to deploy Ge n e ral . Only
Napoleonic armies may deploy generals.
6.3 Establish the Number of Forces
in Each Army
It is very important to establish before the game how
many Forces (and thus, sub-commanders) exist in each
army. If playing a pre-made scenario, this information
is already given to you. When designing your own sce-
nario, make sure thi is clearly specified. Do cavalry
corps count as Forces? If they are big enough to com-
prise several units, yes. The decision will be yours
when you design your own scenario. U e the scenarios
included in this book as a guideline.
Example: At Waterloo, Napoleon fielded the I, II,
and VI infantry corps, the Imperial Guard corps, and
the III and N caualry corps. Thus, Napoleon 's army
at Waterloo comprises 6 Forces.
The number of Forces in the army might increase,
if reinforcemen arrive during the game. However, the
number of Forces in an army neuer decreases. Even if
every single unit in a Force has been blasted to
smithereens and there is not a single living soul from
that Force still on the field , it is still counted for that
day of battle. (If playing a multi-day battle, then a re-
count of Forces will occur for the second day of battle,
which is essentially another game.)
6.4 Establish Ratings for Officers
This book includes scenarios with all information
already provided to you: unit labels pre-printed with
information, and officers rated for that battle. If you
wish to design your own scenarios, however, you will
have to calculate values for the leaders you are depict-
ing. The army commander will have to be given a Skill
rating: Great, Good, Average, or Poor. The sub-com-
manders will have to be given control numbers and
their radii calculated. Guidelines are in Appendix II.
6.41 Calculating the Radii of Sub-
Commanders
A sub-commander has a Radius Multiplie r of 1.0 (if
he is of "normal" ability), or 1.5 (if he and his staff are
exceptionally skilled.) The radius multipliers for all
sub-commanders can be found in Appendix II.
Multiply the radius multiplier by the number of
units in the Force, and the result will be the sub-com-
mander's radius, in inches. Round up to the nearest
whole inch. (For example, if he has a radius multiplier
of 1.5, and his Force comprises 9 units, then his radius
would be 14".)
There are minimum and maximum allowable radii
for sub-commanders, depending upon whether they
are in Traditional or Napoleonic armies:
Traditional army N apoleonic army
Sub-commander Sub-commande r
Min: 3" Ma..x: 15" Min: 6" Max: 20"
During the course of the battle, if units in his Force are
destroyed, the sub-com mander's radius does not
decrease. If you are playing a scenario in which units of
his Force arrive later on the field as reinforcements,
you will have to expand his radius when they arrive.
Add the new arrivals to his original number of units,
even if some of those original units might no longer
exist, and multiply the new total by his multiplier. A
ub-commander's radius can increase, but it does not
decrea e during a day of battle.
7.0 The Playing Surface
Wargames are usually played on a flat tabletop that
assumes a basic "level" for the battlefield, which might
then include different levels of hills higher than that
base, or perhaps river valley or sunken roads lower
than that base level.
For each game, establish the "base level" of the
field . It should be the level of the table surface, itself, or
the level with the majority of flat terrain. That is, in
game terms, "Level 0." A one-level hill thus rises to
"Level One," and a two-level hill ri es to "Level Two,"
etc. A sunken road or valley or riverbed might sink to
"Level -1," or even lower. All this should be clear to
both players at the outset of the game, unless you are
using a referee, in which case it can be a lot more fun to
have the terrain slightly mysterious, so that the players
will blunder into it, just as real armies did. The referee
can reveal idio yncrasies on the table as he sees fit.
The majority of most table-top battlefields consists
of "clear" terrain, which has no effect on movement or
combat. However, the battlefield might also have
forests, roads, rivers, bridges, and built-up areas repre-
senting towns. For purposes of movement, there are
only three classes of terrain: 1) Clear, 2) Rough, and
3) Impa s able.
Impassable terrain, obviously, may not be moved
across at all, by any units. This might include an
unfordable river or lake, or extremely rough ground.
Rough terrain is anything that would slow and
possibly disorder a moving unit: woods,
marsh/ swamp, crops, rocky ground, a ford in a river,
 Setting up for Play .

etc. Rough terrain can have different effects on the dif- 8.0 Front, Flanks, Rear
ferent types of units. Infantry, for instance, can move From the comers of each
through woods more easily than cavalry, where the unit's base, imaginary
horses stumble on roots and the riders must duck out lines extend, dividing
of the way of branches. the space around that
In addition to terrain types are terrain Ob tac1es. unit into its front, flanks,
These would be thing which units do not occupy or and rear. The region
move through, but rather move across. These would stretching away from the
include walls, fences, hedge lines, or earthwork forts, unit's front is also
etc. These should also be made clear before the game. known as its "frontal
Some obstacles are completely impassable, while some perspective. "
are passable to infantry. Most obstacles are impassable It is often important to determine the position of
to artillery. enemy units relative to one's own. Does an enemy unit,
for instance, lie within your front, or is it on your flank?
7.1 Soft: and Hard Cover In many ca es, this will b obvious, but if you are not
Units may occupy various terrain or man-made fea- sure, extend those imaginary 4s-degree lines from the
tures which give them cover, either "soft" or "bard," corners of your unit, and determine how much of an
depending upon the type. These can be kept secret enemy unit's base lies within each perspective. If most
from one or both sides, if a referee is present, until of the enemy unit's base is within your flank perspec-
revealed by an action taken by one of the players (for tive, then that enemy unit i "on your flank."
instance, the attackers assault the chateau, only to real-
ize that it provides the defenders with hard cover.)
Without a referee, players should be clear up-front as
to what areas provide what type of cover.
Soft Cover is provided to units in earthen redoubts
or hasty trenches, wooden buildings, or by being com-
pletely in a forest or wooded area. Cover mean exact-
ly that; men's bodies are protected from fire. A wooden
fence, for instance, would not provide adequate cover.
Hard Cover is provided to units behind a stone
wall, in ide stone buildings, or behind fully prepared
defensive works.

In the diagram above, French unit 1 is near two

7.2 Towns / Built-Up Areas Prus ian units, A and B. Prussian A lies mo tly on 1's
The best way to simulate towns and built-up-areas is to flank; therefore A is said to be on l'S flank. Prussian B,
make cardboard square somewhat larger than a stan- however, lies mostly within l'S frontal perspective.
dard unit base: a 4" square, for instance. Paint the Therefore, Prussian B lies to 1's front.
square stone grey and then paint a brick pattern on it.
Onto this base you will place the miniature buildings of
the town, but when a unit enters the town area, remove 9.0 Pre-Measuring Distances
the buildings, and place the unit on the cardboard Player are always allowed to measure distances on the
base, centered so that only half an inch of "brick" is tabletop before they make decisions in the game.
showing all around. Only infantry may "occupy" a
town, meaning that they have started or ended their
movement on the town base. Others may move
through.
Try to represent all towns or built-up-area this
way, using multiple town bases for larger towns. Each
base may fit one infantry unit, but no more. A large
town might have three or four bases, for instance.
At rtaht: A town "base" with the building model lifted away
to place an infantry unit on the base.
 B. Playing the Game
Basic Concept
A game of Grande Annee represents a single day of
battle. In a case where a battle lasts more than a single
day, the game has a procedure to follow to represent
the transition from one day of battle to the next. A two-
day battle would be, essentially, two games, one after
the other.
The game divides the day of battle up into Turn .
These turns have a certain basic procedure, but no two
turns are alike. Each tum has a variable number of
Pulse . It is during these Pulses that the players take
most actions, moving and fighting with their units.
Furthermore, the day of battle has a randomly variable
number of turns. The turns and pulses do not repre-
sent a specifically fixed amount of time; they repre-
sent periods of activity, dependent upon human and
natural variables.
1.0 Pre-Game Preparation
If players are playing a scenario written for this game,
such as those provided in this book, then much of the
pre-game preparation will already be done. The ratings
of the officers, the basic length of the game, and the
weather effects will be noted. However, if players are
devising their own cenario, then they will have to per-
form these tasks prior to starting play.
The first step is give ratings to all the officers who
represent the army, corps, and divisional command-
ers, and to ascertain the morale values and thus the
unit strengths for all units in play.
Second, the players should determine the weather
conditions for the day of battle. Weather affects the
movement of units, combat resolutions, and the length
of the battle.
 Playing the Game
1 . 1 Basic Length of the Game
One of the players hould determine the Ba ic
Len gth of this game, in turns. Thi is done by rolling
one die and adding it to the number associated with
the starting weather condition. (C1.l) For instance, if
the total is 8, then the players know that the day of bat-
tle this game represents will have at least eight turn .
Players should write down or otherwise note this.
2.0 The Command Phase
At the beginning of each turn, both sides simultane-
ou ly carry out a Command Phase. First, both players
check to see if any lightly-wounded officers have
returned to their duties (JS.2) This might affect the
chain of command. Then, each of the two opposing
commanders rolls one die on the Command Table,
cro -indexing his roll with his Skill rating. The result
is a multiplier, which will give him the number of
Command Points (CPs) he will have available for
that entire turn. Each player should get that number of
CP chits and place them in his cup. These will be spent
during the tum for various things.
Next in the Command Phase each player should
roll two dice for Initiative. One pla y er s h o uld a lso
r o ll a colored d ie. The player who won the initiative
choo es whether he wishes to be the First Sid e or the
Second Side in the upcoming Pul e.
3.0 The Pulses
Much of what happens in each pul e will be explained
in detail in subsequent chapters. We will quickly pre-
view it here. Both sides simultaneously resolve skir-
mish attacks between their units which are close
enough to do so. They then simultaneously resolve any
artillery fire. Then, the first side player this pulse must
choo e which of his sub-commanders will receive com-
mands. Those who do not must take control tests.
(Issuing commands costs CP chits, which are taken
from the cup and "spent" in this fashion.) A control
test might result in certain restrictions being placed on
a Force for this pulse.
Then the first side moves its units. When the first
side has finished moving, any combats it has initiated
are resolved. Next, the second side does the same
thing: issuing commands, taking control tests for sub-
commanders, moving units, initiating and resolving
combats.
After this, both ides simultaneously remove sup-
pression markers from all artillery units.
Finally, both sides roll for initiative again. The
winner of this roll gets to choose whether he will be the
first side or the second side for the next pulse.
e
3.1 Subsequent Initiative Rolls
When rolling for initiative for pulses after the first one,
if the colored die roll a number equal to or less than
the number of thejust-completed pul e, then there are
no more pulses. Proceed to the Rally egment.
4.0 Simultaneous Rally Segment
At the end of the turn, both player carry out a Rally
Segment, making attempts to recover lost SPs and to
rally any broken units. Finally, any remaining CPs are
discarded.
5.0 E nding the Turn and/ or Game
After one turn end, another begins. However, players
should keep track of the number of turns as they pa s,
and should note the game's basic length. At the end of
. the turn whose number is equal to the basic length,
both players should roll two dice. If both players roll
equal to or less than the current turn's number, then
there are no more turns: the day of battle has ended,
and it is time to move on to assessing victory, or if play-
ing a campaign or multi-day battle, to the procedures
for that.
Example: The basic length was established as 7.
At the end of Turn 7, the game will end if both players
roll seven or less. If not, then there will be another
turn. At the end of that turn, they must both roll 8 or
less for the game to end. The game continues until the
end ofa turn in which both players roll equal to or less
than that tur'n's number.
In most wargames, players know in advance how many turns
they will have to complete their missions, exactly what actions
may happen in those turns, and in what order. By contraSt, in
Grande Armfe there is no fixed time scale because a tum
might represent a furious fifteen minutes packed with action,
or it might represent two hours of lull, depending upon how
players use time. Instead of representing a fixed division of
time, the tum represents a period of activity.
We should bear in mind that the entire concept of a
"tum" is an utterly artificial creation which has nothing to do
with the way that a battle unfolded. Time flows differently for
different people in different situations. We've all had the
experience of time flying by, or dragging by, depending upon
our activities. Better organized people have a better command
of time, and are more efficient in their work. Better com
manders can do more things at once. They are (as one biog
rapher of Wellington put it), good "battlefield managers."
So, to summarize: whether the game lasts six turns or
eleven turns, it still represents a "day of battle." Some battles
were more furious and fastmoving than others. Some were
cut short by exhaustion, or delayed by weather or ground
conditions, or by neither side wanting to get started just yeL
The game's day of battle mayor may not allow you to com-
plete your plans.

Historical Note
Weather is probably the mo t neglected aspect of
wargame rules, yet it was absolutely central to under-
standing how a battle was fought. Weather conditions
affected the way individual units performed, but also
affected the judgment of the senior commanders.
Grande Armee tries to focu on the most important
impact of weather on command: the ability to see. The
army commander's radius is dependent upon the
weather. The smaller his radiu becomes, the more
CPs he will have to spend to control distant Forces.
1.0 Weather Conditions
Grande Armee recognizes four basic weather condi-
tions: Sunny, Normal, Overcast, and Precipitating. (If
the temperature is above freezing, then precipitation
will be rain. If below freezing, then now.)
1.1Weather Condition and the
Game's Basic Length
The number as ociated with each starting weather
condition is al 0 the number used to determine the
game's basic length. If, for instance, the starting
weather is "Normal," then 3 will be added to a die roll,
to determine the game's basic length, in turns. (See the
chart, below right.)
1.2 Variation
A scenario will specify the weather condition and
ground condition at game-start, but also should speci-
fy whether or not there will be "variation." If there is no
variation, then the weather and ground condition
remain constant for the day of battle; nobody rolls to
change them at any point. However, if there is weath-
er variation, then starting on the second turn, at the
beginning of the turn, one player should roll the dice to
determine if the weather has changed. Roll all three
dice together in the commander's jar. If the two white
dice roll doubles, then the weather has changed.
Consult the colored die. If the colored die is odd, then
the weather condition goes up one. If even, down one.
"Up one" and "Down one" refer to the current
weather condition, literally up and down on the weath-
er condition chart, at right. If
the weather last turn was
"Normal," and the player
rolls "Up one," then the
weather is now "Sunny." The Sunny
weather can't go higher than
"Sunny" or lower than Normal
"Precipitating. " Overcast
Precipitating
c. Weather
It was the Duke of Brunswick's wish, that the
whole army should be dmwn up in close order of
battle, and no important step taken until the fog
had sufficiently dispersed .... MollendoTfinsisted
that no time should be lost... and the army was
ordered to march in aduance, incommoded by a
mist that preuented the soldiers seeing objects
within twenty yards of them.
- Gneisenau, describing the Pruss ian deployment
at Auerstadt
2.0 Visibility and the Army
Commander's Radius
The weather conditions determine the visibility each
turn. This is used by sub-commanders when acting on
their own, to determine whether or not they can see
the enemy. It is used by units, to determine visibility
for artillery fire. T h e curr e nt vi ibiJity i als o each
arm y c omma nde r ' radiu .
If the army (or wing) commander is on a Vantage
P oint, he may add 6" to his vi ibility, in any weather
condition. If there is currently Fog on the field, all
army or wing commanders must subtract 6" from their
visibility limits.
Note that the sub-commanders' radii were not
dependent upon vi ibility, but determined by their
multipliers.
The army commander's radius is based upon a
visual limit, which determines the speed of his deci-
sions (his use of CPs.) But a sub-com mander's radius
is based on how well he can manage the forces under
his command: a function of staff efficiency and his own
skills. There is only so much "front" that he can cover.
Units fight as compactly as possible in order to stay
coherent. Thus it is unlikely that a corps will be spread
out thinly across a wide swath of battlefield. Instead,
the sub-commander must have some depth in his
deployment, some reserves.
3.0 What Affects Visibility?
Visibility does not extend more than one inch through
woods or a town. An enemy unit 2" behind the edge of
a forest can not be seen from outside that forest. Make
sure, before beginning a game, that both players
24"
4
3 20"
2 16"
1 12"
 Weather .
understand the effects of the terrain on visibility, and
u e common ense to judge when a line of sight is
blocked.
Visibility is not blocked by the presence of units,
friendly or enemy. It is assumed that the officer,
mounted on a horse, and/or on a patch of higher
ground, and/or using a telescope, can see over,
through, and around the formations of men on the
field. (It would be too hard to write a rule, at thi scale,
for the presence of smoke in front of units which have
been firing, etc.)
4.0 Vantage Points
An officer is said to occupy a "vantage point" ifhe is on
the highest elevation level possible on the table. If
there are no elevations on the table at all (i.e., there are
no hill - everything is Level 0 or less), then there is no
modifier for vantage point.
Example: The "normal" level of a battlefield is
considered Level o. Hills may be various levels above
the norm. If there are any level-2 hills on the board,
the army commander would need to be on a level-2
hill in order to meet this criterion. If there are only
level-l hills on the table, the army commander would
get the "vantage point" designation for being on a
level-l hill.
5.0 Ground Condition
The game designates three different ground condi-
tions: Hard, Soft, and M ud.
Hard ground will change to Soft after two consec-
utive turns of rain or snow. (Even though the ground
might be frozen, thousands of men and horses will
soon turn the accumulated snow into a slippery
sludge.) Soft ground will turn to Mud after two more
consecutive turns of rain (but not snow).
Ground can also dry out. Mud will turn to Soft
ground after two consecutive turns of Sunny or
Normal weather, and Soft ground will turn to Hard
after two more consecutive turns of Sunny or Normal
weather.
Hard ground is considered "normal" for game pur-
poses. Soft ground incurs some penalties. Mud incurs
further penalties. Long-range artillery fire is not as
effective in soft ground or mud, although point-blank
artillery fire in defense of the battery is actually more
effective, since the soft ground slows the approach of
enemy infantry and cavalry, exposing them longer to
canister, which doesn't need hard ground to bounce
along.
In the Mud, artillery units become more difficult
to move (their wheels bog down). Also, no unit may
ford a river if the ground condition is Mud.
6.0 Other Effe cts of Precipitation
No unit may skirmish attack in the rain or snow. Also,
because of the impotence of muskets in a heavy rain,
infantry becomes les effective again t cavalry. In com-
bat, cavalry get a saving throw in the rain against
infantry. Artillery fire is not affected by rain, although
it is affected if the ground gets soft or muddy.
7.0 Fog
It is difficult to state a general rule for fog, because it
could exist in certain areas ofthe battlefield and not in
others. For game purposes, when we say there is fog on
the field, we mean that it is generally hard to see
because of early morning mist or low-lying clouds.
If the players are recreating a battle at which they
know fog was a factor, then they should note that the
game opens with fog, and thus reduce all visibility by
6". Starting on the second turn, roll one die during the
weather variation phase. If the die roll i equal to or
less than the current turn number, then the fog has
burned off.
Many miniatures games try to recreate the various advantages
or disadvantages of staff systems by renecting these differences
in a commanders radius. While staff systems did differ from
army to army, these differences were more likely to be seen
while on campaign, not once battle was joined. When armies
deployed for battle, commanders tended to issue orders ver-
bally, or perhaps scribbled out a few lines to an aide.
In other words, most staffs functioned alike on the bat-
tlefield. There were certainly differences in the energy, com-
petence, and perceptiveness of commanders and their assis-
tants, and these differences we depict by the different
amounts of CPs available to each chief, tum by tum. But when
we speak of a command "radius" (which of course is a com-
plete wargame abstraction), our comma nders are more limit-
ed by geography and weather than by their staff officers. O n
a clear, sunny day, a commander with a good vantage point
might be able to distinguish different formations up to two
miles away (roughly 33"). In a blinding snowstorm like that at
the battle of Eylau, a commander would be lucky to see much
more than half a mile (roughly 9").
Commanders used telescopes, but these were rarely bet-
ter than x4 magnification. So this immediate visual distance is
important, because it represents the maximum point at which
a commander can make decisions based upon what he himself
can observe. Beyond that distance, he depends upon news
brought to him by couriers, and his decisions are hamstrung
by the uncertainty of assigning objectives he can't see to units
he can't see.
 D. The Command Phase
1.0 Lightly Wounded Officers May
Return to Duty
At the beginning of the command phase, both sides roll
to see if any officers who had been lightly wounded in
a previous turn may return to their duties. For each
such officer, roll one die. On a roll of 5 or higher, the
officer has recovered and returned to his duties.
2.0 Using the CP Chits
Keep a pile of CP chits somewhere handy, but prefer-
ably not on the game table itself. Each player should
have an opaque cup. In the command phase of each
turn, a player receives a certain amount of CP chits. He
expends them performing certain activities, and when
they are expended, they should be tossed back into the
pile. At certain points in a turn, if a player rolls doubles
on the initiative roll, he may be able to get more CPs
added to hi cup. CPs can not be accumulated from
turn to turn. If the turn ends and he still ha CP chits
left in his cup, he must dump them all back into the
pile.
3.0 The Command Table - Getting
CPs each Turn
The second action of the command phase is for each
commander to determine how many CPs he will have
available for that turn. To do this, he must know how
many Forces he has on the field. Remember that this is
calculated at the beginning of the game, but the arrival
of reinforcements might increase this number.
Players should consult the Command Table,
rolling a die on the correct row for either a Napoleonic
or a Traditional army, and cross-indexing with the
commander's Skill rating for that day. The result will
Wellington was stumping about and munching in
a littlefarmyard among the brown cottages of Los
Arapiles, lunching apparently off alternate bites of
chicken and glances at the French through a tele-
scope. The Peer's lunch was interrupted by afinal
look towards the French. "By God," he suddenly
exclaimed, "that will do!"
- Guedalla, describing Wellington's decision to
attack at Salamanca
be a multiplier. Multiply this by the number of Forces
in the army. Round up any decimals. This is the num-
ber of CPs the player will have for that turn.
Example: For Waterloo, we rate Napoleon as
~verage. n Let's say that he rolls a 3. That's a multi-
plier of 3.5 times his 6 Forces = 21. This turn,
Napoleon will have 21 Command Points. The
Napoleon player should draw 21 CP chits and put
them in his cup.
3.1 Limits on CPs
No matter what is rolled on the Command Table, a
Napoleonic army may never have more than 60 CPs in
its cup at any time, and a Traditional army may never
have more than 50. Any xce s must be discarded at
once. If you roll doubles and get more CPs during the
turn, then you may only take as many CPs as would get
you up to that maximum level.
No maner how great the commander, the limits of commu
nicatlon (not to mention human endurance) in the horse and
musket era meant that when armies exceeded 100,000
men, command efficiency tended to bog down. The really
big banles were long, grueling affairs that moved slowly.
They were characterized by inaction or stalemate in one part
of the "front" while activity raged in another are.]. In some
ways, they were a harbinger of the First World Wa r.

D3.0 The Command Table

Die Roll
Napoleonic Army 1 2 3 4 5 6
Traditional Army 1 2 3 4 5 6
Great 40 45 50 55 6.0 65 70
Good 30 35 40 45 50 55 6.0
Average 30 30 35 35 40 45 50
Poor 30 30 30 35 35 40 45
 The Command Phase G
4.0 Roll to Determine Initiative for 4.2 Receiving Extra CPs
the First Pulse Also, when rolling for initiative after thefirst pulse, if
The final step in the Command Pha e is to determine a player rolls d oub le , he may be entitled to receive
I n itiative. Both players should have two dice, and one more CP . Assuming the colored die hasn't ended the
player should also have a colored die. When rolling turn, a player who e initiative roll is doubles may take
for initiative for the first pulse of a tum, the colored die a number of CPs equal to the colored die's roll, and add
is u ed only as a tie-breaker. However, when rolling for them to his cup.
initiative in all subsequent pul es, this colored die is a
tie-breaker and also has two other important func- 5.0 CPs and Army Morale
tion . It will determine whether or not there will be a Prior to completing a Command Phase, a player may
next pulse, and may also determine how many addi- expend CPs that will be applied toward an army
tional CPs a player receives. morale check at the end of the tum. (See L3.1) These
Prior to the initiative roll, players may secretly CP chits should be set aside; they are "spent" and not
allocate CPs from their cups to add to the initiative roll. u able for anything else this turn, but they should not
(Hide them in your hand, and then release them while be di carded until actually used for army morale.
rolling - both sides do this simultaneously.) Each CP
chit thrown in gives a +1 bonus to the player's roll. (A
roll of 3 plus two CP chits becomes a roll of 5, etc.)
Command Points: The General Concept
Wargames have always struggled with ways to show that
The player with the higher modified roll has won
one general was better than another, particularly since we
the initiative for the first Pulse. In a tie, the colored die
players who represent the generals possess advantages the
serves as a tie-breaker: if the colored die comes up
generals would never have had. Grande Annee is based
even, the tie is won by the player who rolled it. If odd,
upon the premise that a "great" general is somebody who
by the other player.
can manage time better than the average person, perhaps
The player who won the initiative chooses whether
concentrating on one thing, perhaps devoting a little time
he wishes to be the Fir t Sid e or the Second Side in
to each or several things. Command efrectiveness, in our
the upcoming Pulse.
system, is measured by the amount or attention a general
chooses to give to various tasks, under the limitation that he
4.1 Subsequent Initiative Rolls: has only so much attention to give. The commander can
only directly manage so many things at once. The more
How Many Pulses in a Turn?
spread out his army becomes, the harder it is to manage,
At the completion of each pulse, both sides roll for ini-
and the more his attention will be sapped (and, thus, the
tiative again. Again, they may secretly commit CP chits
more he will have to depend upon his subordinates.)
to modify the roll. The winner of this roll gets to choo e
whether he will be the first side or the second side for
the next pulse.
When rolling for initiative for pul es after the fir t
one, if the colored die rolls a number equal to or less
than the number of thejust-completed pulse, then the
turn ends immediately. Any CPs not spent are lost.
(For example, Pulse #2 has just ended. The players
are rolling to see who will have the initiative in Pulse
#3. If the colored die comes up huo or less, then there
will be no Pulse #3 - the turn has ended.) Obviously,
this means that a turn will never have more than six
pulses, and it could have as few as one.
When the colored die ends the tum, both players
should carry out the Rally Segment.

Ah, even great commanders run out or CPs sooner or

later Don't let this be you!

1 .0 Basic Concept
In the scale represented by Grande Armee, skinnish-
ers are invisible. Yet we must imagine that they are
everywhere, spread out in small groups and squads,
crouching behind rocks or stalks of wheat in the fields,
or behind trees. When their anny is on the attack, they
advance ahead of the formed troops, and when on the
defense they do their be t to disrupt and break up the
enemy assaults as they approach. As an anny com-
mander, the most important thing to remember about
skinni hers is that they are completely beyond your
control.
In each pul e, skinnish combat i resolved simul-
taneously, prior to either side moving and initiating
"real" combats. Skinnishers can cause confusion in
enemy units, are sometimes able to cause light 10 es,
and might even get very lucky and pick off a general
every now and then.
The skinnishers' main duty was to harass and distract the
enemy. A5 with maneuver and drill systems, each nation
used a different doctrine for skinnishing, and these doctrines
changed over time during the wars. The British appear to
have been the most bold skinnishers, venturing 500-600
yards in front of their fonned troops. Some Austrian
Grenzers and French Legere battalions, when completely
broken down to skinnish, might also stray that far afield. But
in general, the skinnish "line" was supposed to exist just
beyond musketry range of the fonned troops. M arshal
Davout, for instance, instructed his officers to place skir-
mishers no more than 200 yards in front of their parent bat-
talions. M any annies used a two-tiered system with a thin
skinnish line perhaps 200-300 yards in front, and a heavier
"reserve" skirmish screen about 100 yards from the main
line, with men rotating through this rank when they were
tired or low on ammunition. The Russians seem to have had
virtually no system for infantry skirmishing before I B 10,
sometimes drafting whole battalions of militia as "strelki,"
sometimes using the "third rankers," as the Austrians occa-
sionally did, sometimes deploying select J;!gers only 30-60
yards ahead of the main body. Russian Cossacks, however,
were probably the best cavalry skinnishers in the world.
In Grande AlTTlee we represent the "range" of skir-
mishing as roughly double the distance that these screens
theoretically operated, because we are showing the effect of
skirmishers versus skirmishers. If your skirmishers gain the
upper hand, as the two sides draw close, then they will push
the enemy skirmishers back, and now your sharpshooters will
be in a position to annoy, distract (and kill!) the enemy
formed troops.
E. Skirmishing
We saw [the Cossacks] calmly reloading their mus-
kets as they left theJield, walking their horses
between our squadrons. They relied upon the slow-
ness of our picked troops as much as on their own
mounts.... They turned around several times and
faced us, but always just beyond musket range.
- Segur, Napoleon's Russian Campaign
2.0 Who Can Skirmish Attack
Only certain infantry units can initiate skinnishing,
which is known as a "skirmish attack." In Appendix III
infantry units are assigned a kinnish rating, hereafter
referred to as "SK." This can be 0, 1, or 2,as follows:
o The unit has only rudimentary skirmish
capability, and can't skirmish attack.
1 The unit has "average" skirmish ability.
2 The unit has good skirmish ability.
Only infantry units with a SK greater than zero may
skinnish attack. A routed unit may not skinnish attack
nor be the target of skirmish attack. A unit may not
make a skirmish attack if it is beyond the radius of its
sub-commander.
For clarity on the unit labels, it is not necessary to
mark a unit that has a zero skinni h ability. If there is
no SK value printed, it should be assumed that the unit
has SKo. Units which can initiate skinnish attacks are
marked SKI or SK2.
3.0 Skirmishing and Targets
A unit may skirmish attack any enemy infantry or
artillery (not cavalry) unit within range of its frontal
perspective, even if it can not see that unit. (The skir-
mishers have undoubtedly snuck up within range, and
from several different angles, so visibility isn't a prob-
lem.) The range for SKI units is 4". The range for SK2
units is 6".
3.1 Skirmishing Restrictions
A unit may only skirmish attack one enemy unit per
pulse. If more than one possible target exists, the own-
ing player may select. No unit may be the target of
more than one skinnish attack per pulse, although a
single attack might involve multiple attackers.
It is possible for two or more units to skirmish
attack a single enemy target, but only if no other
enemy targets exi t for those units. If a player has mul-
tiple SK-capable units within range of multiple eligible
enemy targets, then he must skinnish attack as many
of those enemy units as possible. For instance, if there
are three SK-capable units and two eligible targets,
then both of those eligible targets must be attacked by
 Skirmishing
somebody. All three attackers couldn't "gang up" on
one target, leaving the other unmolested.
3.2 Cavalry
In the presence of cavalry, infantry commanders tend-
ed to consolidate, forming rna s or square, and draw-
ing in light troops (or at least the light troops would lay
low to avoid the menace of cavalry.) Consequently, a
unit may not kirmish attack if there is an enemy cav-
alry unit within 2" of it or its target, in any direction
(even if the cavalry is behind the target, not "in the
way" of the skirmish attack.) Obviously, this mean
that cavalry may never be the target of a skirmish
attack.
Example of Sldnnlshlng: I;:]
GJ 0 [Il~
=
xxxx ~x ~
x~:
Austrian infantry units 1,2,3, and a cavalry unit face French
infantry units A,B, and C during skirmish combat. Assume
that all infantry units are within range to make SK-attacks
against each other, and that the cavalry is within 2" of
Austrian 3.
The Austrians make their attadcs first:
Each Austrian infantry unit has at least one French unit to its
front, and there are no opportunities to double up against
anyone French defender. Therefore, I will attack A, 2 will
attack B, and 3 will attack C.
Now the French make their attacks:
French C can't attack Austrian 3, because the Austrian cav-
alry is too close to 3. But it could attack Austrian 2.
Therefore, French Band C will double up against Austrian
2. French A will attack Austrian I. In this way, all Austrian
units which are eligible to be attacked have been attacked.
Remember that all SK-attack results are applied simultane-
ously, so even though the Austrians went "first," any hits
scored are applied only after all attacks are clone on both
sides.
e
4.0 Skirmish Attacks
Both players resolve skirmi h attack, and all results
are applied simultaneously, after all those attacks are
resolved. In the Skirmish phase of the pul e, each play-
er starts on his leftrno t side of the battlefield, check-
ing to see if his infantry units meet the above criteria
for making skirmi h attacks. He can freely measure
distance to any enemy units, to check. When opportu-
nities for skirmish attacks arise, they must be resolved.
(Remember that the skirmishers are not under your
control. They are seeking all targets of opportunity.)
4.1 The Order of Skirmish Attacks
Any unit can defend against a skirmish attack, even if
it has an SK value of zero. But only units with SK val-
ues of lor 2 may initiate skirmi h attacks.
The player designates an enemy unit as the target
of a skirmish attack. All of his units that will skirmish
attack that enemy must now do so, together. After that
attack is resolved, the player may designate a different
enemy unit. Remember:
No unit may skirmish attack more than one
enemy unit per puis .
Any unit which may skirmi h attack must do so.
No enemy unit can be the target of more than
one skirmish attack per pulse, although it might
be attacked by more than one unit in a single
attack.
If you have multiple SK-attackers and multiple
eligible targets, you must attack as many of those
targets as you can.
4.2 Resolving Skirmish Attacks
To re olve a skirmish attack, the attacker rolls a die
and adds the SK value of all his units which are partic-
ipating in this attack. The target rolls a die and adds his
SK (if any). There are no modifiers for terrain, since we
are depicting many small firefights and ambushes, and
terrain conditions hamper and aid both sides.
4.21 Against an Infantry Target
If the attacker's total is higher than the target's, then
the attack was successful. The target unit loses lSP.
Obviously, this will occasionally break weak units. This
would represent the unit completely losing cohesion as
a result of the death of officers and collapse of morale.
If the attacker s total is equal to or less than the
target's total, the attack was unsuccessful; move on to
the next skirmish attack.

4.22 Against an Artillery Target
The attacker's total must be at least double the target's
to be successful. If successful, the artillery unit has
been "suppressed." (The gunners are distracted and
harried by the skirmishers, perhaps trying to drive
them off with fire.) Place a marker on a suppre ed bat-
tery (a puff of cotton works well). A suppressed battery
may not fire in the upcoming artillery fire phase.
Suppression only lasts one pul e. In the Rally
Segment of each pulse, remove all suppression mark-
ers from all artillery. (J3.0)
There was little that artillerists could do against enemy skir-
mishers, to their great frustration. A Federal gunner in the
Civil War once said: "Firing at skirmishers with artillery is like
chasing a swarm of bees with a club."
4.23 Completing Skirmish Attacks
Take turns resolving the attacks, if you wish, or pro-
ceed through one side completely, and then the other.
All skirmi h attacks on both sides are resolved in this
phase, and are resolved before any of the effects are
placed on any units; it is all considered to be happen-
ing simultaneously. (A unit broken by losing its last SP
from a skirmish attack would still get the chance to
make its own skirmish attack, if eligible, before it
broke.)
Examples of Skirmish A ttacks:
Two French infantry units (both SK2) are skirmish
attacking a Prussian infantry unit (SKl). The Prussians
roll a "4," giving them a total of 5. The French roll a
"2," which when added to their SK numbers, gives
them a total of 6. The French total is higher; the
Prussians lose ISP.
Example Two: A French infantry unit (SK2) is 5"
from an Austrian infantry unit (SKl). The French,
because they are SK2, can initiate an attack up to 6"
away. But the Austrians, because they are SKl, could
only skirmish attack an enemy unit up to 4" away. So
the French will skirmish attack the Austrians, using
one die plus two, while the Austrians defend using one
die plus one. But the Austrian unit won't be able to
make an attack against this French unit, because it is
too far away.
5.0 Rain and Snow
Skirmishing is nearly impossible in the rain or snow,
due to wet muskets and poor visibility. Therefore, no
units may skirmish attack on a turn when it is raining
or snowing. Although the weather may be relatively
"dry" in a snowstorm, the heat of a musket causes any
Skirmishing
snow to melt as soon as it lands on it, and thus makes
it wet after one or two shots. Snow al 0 obscures visi-
bility, making it hard to get a good shot, or to stay in
touch with other skirmishers.
6.0 The Cossacks: SK2
Russian Kazakh ("Cossack") units are an exception to
the rule which states that cavalry may not skirmish
attack. Not only are Co acks cavalry which prevent
skirmi h attacks within 2", they are also considered
SK2 units which can skirmish attack just like infantry.
The Cossacks may have been nearly worthle s as battle
cavalry, but there is a reason that mo t Russian armies
traveled with a horde of them. They were aggre sive
and brilliant skirmishers who compensated the
Rus ian army for its ineptitude in infantry skirmishing.
(And, best of all, the Cossacks never asked for a pay-
check!)
7.0 Mixed Brigades: +1 on defense
Because of their attached cavalry, mixed brigades
receive a +1 to their die rolls when defending against a
skirmish attack. Their SK value, however (when mak-
ing a skirmi h attack) is still dependent upon the pre-
dominant type of infantry in the brigade.
8.0 Ottoman Artillery
Skirmishers: +1 on defense
A typical Ottoman artillery battery comprised ten guns,
served by 80 gunners and about 40 other men, includ-
ing officers and NCOs. Unique to the Ottoman army,
however, was the practice of including an additional
20-60 sharpshooters, attached to the battery specifi-
cally for the purpo e of defending it from enemy
infantry and cavalry skirmishers. Due to the presence
of these men, Ottoman artillery units receive a +1 to
their die roll when defending against skirmish attacks.
9.0 Hard Cover and Towns
If the target of a skirmish attack is completely protect-
ed by (I.e., in) hard cover or a town, then it gets a +2
modifier to its roll when defending against a skirmish
attack. The target unit's base must be entirely protect-
ed by the cover. Being behind a stone wall isn't enough;
a unit would have to be entirely in a walled town or for-
tified area in order to get the hard cover bonus. (This is
usually the case for garrisons.)
However, a unit in hard cover or a town may not
make a skirmish attack.
F. Artillery Fire
... the very damp soil thatformed the ridges of
these furrows wasjlying about in little black
lumpsjlung three or four feet into the air. He
heard a sharp cry close by him; it was two hus-
sarsfalling struck by a shot. He looked in vain in
the direction from which the shots were coming.
He saw the white smoke of the battery an enor-
mous distance away, and in the midst of the
steady and continuous rumble produced by theftr-
ing of the guns, he seemed to hear the volleys of
shot much closer at hand. He could not make
head or tail of what was happening.
- Stendhal, La Chartreuse de Parme
Historical Note
Artillery was the deadlie t branch of Napoleonic
armies, accounting for anywhere from 60-80% of casu-
alties on the battlefield. In Grande Armee, our cale
means that artillery units are very small, yet very
important entities. The guns we place on the table rep-
resent those batteries which were not specifically dedi-
cated to the support of an infantry division. Since mo t
guns in a corps were indeed deployed in light or medi-
um foot batteries which were assigned at the divisional
level (and sometimes broken up into sections across
the front of infantry units), we thus limit ourselves to
the hor e batteries and the heavy corp reserve batter-
ies. Though few in number, when these mobile reserve
artillery units are combined on the field, they can be
formidable.
1.0 Basic Concepts
Just as Grande Armee doe n't distinguish between for-
mations for infantry and cavalry units, we likewise
don't make artillery limber in order to move, and
unlimber to fire. It is assumed that the local com-
manders will take care of thi . Your job as army com-
mander is simply to tell the artillery where you want
them to be. They must then find the best means of get-
ting there and deploying to fight.
Artillery fire is resolved simultaneously. Each
player starts on his left - at the left-most side of his
army - and works his way to the right, resolving
artillery fire. Players can take turns resolving, although
no results apply to any targets until all fire is resolved.
Each artillery unit may only fire once per pul e.
After it fires, place a puff of cotton in front of it, to show
that it may not fire again. Artillery units which are sup-
pressed will already have that cotton there, to remind
you that they may not fire in this pulse.
2.0 Facing and Firing
An artillery unit may fire at any unit which is at least
partially within range (some part of its base is within
the artillery unit's range), and at least partially within
its frontal perspective. The artillery must be able to see
its target, given the limits on visibility for weather and
terrain. Artillery fire may only penetrate one inch into
woods or forest, and is blocked completely by building
or other forms of cover. (Units in those buildings or
cover may be fired upon, but the fire can't go through
the buildings or cover to hit another unit behind them.)
Artillery may not pivot or change facing prior to
firing. This might result in some strange-looking situa-
tions, such as when an enemy unit has passed by the
artillery, or is immediately to its rear. But a battery of
artillery was not like a gun turret. Two hundred men
with two-ton guns, cai sons, and dozens of hor es
couldn't simply "rotate" and fire. They had to limber
up, move the battery, and unlimber again. If the enemy
had broken through on the flank or rear, they would
mo t likely be busy getting the hell out of there!
3.0 Targets
Artillery fire in Grande A,mee is resolved by target.
Starting at his left, the firing player points out an
enemy unit he wishes to fire on, and then all of his
units that will fire on that target must do so together.
Once that fire is re olved, no other units may fire on
that enemy unit in thi pulse. Mark units which have
fired with cotton balls. (This prevents the silly
warga me practice of shooting at a unit, seeing how it
goes, and then shooting with another unit, and so on,
until you get the result you want.)
The firing player may always measure the distance
to any target before he announces which units will be
shooting. He then resolves fire against that target.
4.0 Line of Fire
The line of fire is not a razor-thin line; it is as wide as
the artillery unit's frontage. When tracing a line of fire
to a target, your artillery unit must have an "alley" of
unob tTucted fire on that target at least as wide as the
artillery unit's frontage, in order to make a clear shot.
If the line of fire is partially obstructed by terrain or
cover, or the presence of another unit, then no shot
may be taken.
A player may not fire "over" or "through" one unit
to hit another. The gunners shoot at the closest target
they can see in the direction they have chosen.
 Artillery Fire

5.0 Mandatory Fire 12-pdr artillery unit scores hits on rolls of 2-6. When
If there are no non-routed enemy units within 6" of its firing beyond 6" and up to 10", it scores hits on rolls of
frontal perspective, then an artillery unit may fire on 4-6. Between 10" and 16" it scores hits on rolls of 5-6.
any target it wishes. However, if there is at least one Beyond 16" it may not fire.
non-routed enemy unit within 6" of its front, then that
artillery unit mustfire on the closest enemy unit to its 6.1 Saving Throws
front to which it has a clear line offire. Once the fire is re olved, the target unit may be eligible
for saving throws, which might negate some of those
6.0 Resolving Artillery Fire hits just scored.
An artillery unit r oll one die p er SP. (Normally
that means it rolls two dice, but if it has suffered one 6.11 Resolving Saving Throws
hit, it only rolls one die.) An artillery unit may also add A target has a Save Number, calculated by adding
a bonus die if the target is Vulnerable (Using road together all the factors from the Saving Throw List. For
movement, on a bridge, fording, or an infantry or cav- example: An artillery unit (2) protected by soft cover
alry unit being fired at from the flank or rear.) An (2) has a Save Number of 4. No matter how many of
artillery unit may never add more than one bonus die. the above apply, a target unit's Save Number can never
The firing player rolls his dice, hoping to score be more than 5.
Hits. Consult the Artille ry Chart. It shows the range The target player rolls a number of dice equal to
brackets of each gun-type, as well as the To Hit the number of hits scored. For each die which is equal
Numbe r s for each type, at each range. to or less than the save number, a hit is negated. Any
French Old Guard units may add 1 to each die, hits which are not saved are now applied to the target
although a natural " I " always misses. unit.
F6.o The Artillery Chart
A die scores a
hit if it rolls with-
in the printed To
Gun Size To Hit # / Range
Hit numbers for Heavy (9-12 1bs) 2-6 6" 4-6 10" 5-6 16"
that type of gun,
at that range. For Medium (6-8 lbs) 3-6 4" 5-6 12"
instance, when Light (3-41bs) 3-6 3" 6 9"
firing up to 6", a
 A rtillery Fir e .
Saving Throw List
2 Soft cover
4 Hard cover or unit within town base
2 The target unit is artillery or engineer
1 Firer and target on different elevations.
3 The ground condition is Mud *
2 The ground is Soft *
These two save numbers are ignored if the artillery unit is fir-
ing at hort range (in its shortest range bracket.) Cani ter is, if
anything actually more effective in the mud, inee horses and
men are lower, easier targets.
6 .2 Cover From Artillery Fire
When dealing with cover, it is po ible that the target
might have cover against the fire of one artillery unit,
but not another. (It might be behind a tone wall,
which gives it a save against a shot coming acro s that
wall, but not a save against a shot coming from
behind.) Again, it is u eful to use dice of different col-
ors, so as to keep clear which hits are being saved for
under which circumstances. '
6-pdr gun is 6" from target.
It gets a bonu die, and hits
on roll of 5-6.
12-pdr gun is 9" from target.
It hits on rolls of 4-6, but its fire is
coming across the wall, so the tar-
get will get a saving throw against
any of these hits.
In the diagram above, the 6-pdr gets a bonus die because it is
firing into the Hank of the infantry (the infantry is a Vulnerable
target from that direction.) At its range of 6", it hits on 5-6.
The 12-pdr is 9" away, and hits on rolls of 4-6. But any
hits scored by the 12-pdr might be negated by the target's sav-
ing throw, because of the wall across which this fire is coming.
7.0 The "Final Shot"
If an artillery unit is attacked by enemy infantry or cav-
alry from its front, it will get a "final shot" at its attack-
er prior to contact. This is slightly different from nor-
mal artillery fire, because it repre ents a fairly con-
fused situation, with a limited amount of time and the
panic of an approaching enemy.
For a final shot, roll the correct number of dice as
in normal artillery fire. The To-Hit numbers, however,
are different. Regardle of gun size, an artillery
final shot hits enemy infantry on roll of 4-6
and hits enemy cavalry on rolls of 5-6. Ther~
are no aving throw and no modifier
It is possible that an artillery unit may get its final
shot, and then escape its attacker. It is also possible
that the final shot might break an attacker. An artillery
unit may only make one final hot per pul e. If attacked
~gain in that pulse, it might still be able to escape, but
It couldn't take another final shot.
Unlike normal fire, an artillery unit may take a
final shot even if it is suppres ed.
8.0 Artillery Beyo n d the Sub-
Commander's Radius
If an artillery unit is ever beyond the radius of its sub-
commander, it may not fire in the artillery pha e,
although it may still make a Final hot.
Why Is there no "pass-through" fire?
In Grande Ann~e a unit represents a target of several bat-
talions, SQuadrons, or many gun crews, limbers, etc. The
bounce-through of the ball is factored into the damage done
to all those ranks arrayed on the base-stand. Otherwise, the
damage dished out by artillery would be far too great.
Shouldn't Cavalry be Harder to Hit Than Infantry?
Grande Ann~e scales cavalry differendy at the outset. A sin-
gle SP of veteran infantry represents the fighting power of
400 men. But an SP of veteran cavalry represents only 250
men. So artillery is already less effective at killing cavalry; it's
factored into the strength points. If you're interested in the
nitty gritty of figure-to-SP ratios, see Appendix I.
 G. The Control Segment
1.0 Bas ic Concepts
The fir t segment of each player's pulse i the "control
segment." At this time the commander decides
whether or not to give "commands" to his various sub-
commanders. A Command costs a number of CPs
ba ed on that ub-commander's Control N umber,
modified by his distance from the army commander. If
a sub-commander receives a command, his Force will
be fully under control, and the owning player may act
with its units in any way he please . If no command
was received, that sub-commander must take a
Control Test. If he pas es the control test, that sub-
commander's Force is fully under control, just as if
he'd received a command. But if he fails the control
test, the owning player must check the Force's status,
as follows :
If the sub-commander can not see any enemy
forces, then his Force will be Inactive in that pulse.
If the sub-commander can see the enemy, then
two dice must be rolled, modified by his Personality, to
determine the status of his Force: Inactive , Adjust,
or Attack !
Thus, at the end of the Control Segment, the status
of all Forces in the army is determined.
2.0 Command Radii
All officers have a command radius. The radius of an
army or wing commander is equal to the current visi-
bility condition, plus any modifier for a vantage point,
or penalty for fog. It may thus change during a game,
as the weather changes. The radius of a sub-com-
mander was established before the game, using his
radius multiplier.
Radius is measured from the edge of the officer's
base outward in all directions. If a unit's Cor another
officer's) base is even partially within the distance of
the radius, it is considered within the radius. Radius is
measured as the crow flies: it is not affected by ter-
rain or even by the presence of enemy units.
3.0 Giving Commands
The commander may give a command to a sub-com-
mander whose base is within his radius by paying a
number of CPs equal to that ub-commander's control
number. He may issue a command to a sub-command-
er who is beyond his radius, by paying additional CPs,
depending on how far away he is. If a sub-commander-
is up to 10 beyond the army commander's radius, a
command co ts an additionallCP to issue. Each incre-
ment of 10" costs another lCP.
The Emperor went up into the windmill, and,
looking through a hole, watched all the move-
ments. "Gerard," said he, "You must go toward
that steeple, and drive the ?russians in asfar as
you can. I will support you."
- Coignet, observing Napoleon at Ligny
The army commander gives all command he
wishes to give. Place the CP chits that were expended
on each sub-commander' base, to remind you that he
was given a command this pulse.
Then, after all commands are issued, he must take
a "Control Test" for each sub-commander who did not
get a command this pulse.
3.1 Grabbing the Lapels ...
If the commander is in ba e-to-base contact with a
sub-commander, then a command to that sub-com-
mander is free and automatic. It co ts no CPs, and
requires no control test.
4.0 The Control Test
Roll one die for a sub-commander, attempting to roll
greater than his control number. If successful, then he
has passed his control test. If you rolled equal to or less
than his control number, then he has "failed" his con-
trol test, and will be acting On His Own in this pulse.
If the sub-commander is within half or less of the
army commander's radius, then he may add one to his
control test roll. (Thus, if Napoleon's radius is 20", a
sub-commander within 10" of Napoleon may add one
to a control te t roll.) Nonetheless, a natural roll Of"l"
always fails a control test.
4.1 Force "Under Control"
If a sub-commander received a command for this pulse
OR ifhe passed his control test, then he is "under con-
trol" for this pulse. He is in touch with army head-
quarters, and understands his mission and is doing his
best to carry it out. You may move and fight with his
Force in any way you please.
4.2 Sub-Commander On His Own
If a sub-commander received no command for this
pulse and failed his control test, then he is acting "on
his own" for this pulse. Perhaps he no longer under-
stands ~is mission, or perhaps he has lost touch with
army headquarters, or maybe his fears or passions
have gotten him a little carried away. In short, he is no
longer totally reliable. The behavior of his Force is now
 The Control Segment CD
dependent on what he can see. (Remember to u e the
current visibility limits from his ba e-stand, as defined
by the weather and terrain.)
If there are no enemy force vi ible to the
ub-commander, then his entire Force is "inactive"
for this pulse. It may not move, nor initiate combats.
Units of the Force do not even roll to establish their
movement allowances, since they can't move at all.
If the s ub-co mma nder can see en m y
fo r ce , then you must roll to determine his reaction.
Roll two dice on the table on the following page, to
determine what hi Force's status will be: Inactive,
Adjusting, or an Attack.
Note that the best way to do this is to roll all three
dice in the jar, for each sub-commander who received
no command. The colored die represents the control
check. If that fails, the two white dice represent the roll
to determine Force status.

has received a command.

g Uhoul I j L4"

' e)" (q 3 / .2"

Example of GMng Commands:

The weather is " Norma!." Thus, Napoleon has a radius of 20" today. He has three sub-commanders, as follows: Ney is 13" away,
Davout is 25" away, and Mmnont is 47" from Napoleon.
Napoleon can issue a command to Ney for 3 CPs, because Ney is within Napoleon's radius, and Ney's control number is 3.
Napoleon can issue a command to Davout at a cost of 2 CPs. (Davout's control number is only I, but he is 5" beyond Napoleon's
radius, meaning a command costs an additional I CP.)
A command to Mmnont would cost 5 CPs. (Marmont's control number is 2, but he is 27" beyond Napoleon's radius. That's
three increments of 10", each with a I CP extra cost.)
 CD The Control Segment

Summary of the Control Segment:

This flowchart reviews the procedure that the commander must follow
with each Force, to determine its status.

Yes: CPs Force is in

Control:
were spent You may move with it

~NO on it. freely.

Take a Control Test

(roll> control number on one die)
Add 1 to the roll if within half the comman-
der's radius, but a natural " I " always fails.
Did the sub-commander pass
the Control Test? Yes
Roll 2 dice to deter-
~NO mine Force Status:

Can the sub-commander see

the enemy?
Yes
Modifiers:
if the sub-commander is
Aggressive.
if visible enemies are only cav-
O alry and/or artillery, but no
infantry.
if the sub-commander is
Cautious.
 The Control Segment CD
4.21 What "Force Status" Means GS.2: Deploying a General
I nactive: In this pulse, the sub-commander himself
can move in any way, but no infantry or cavalry units Fre n ch Russia
may move. Artillery units may only pivot in place. British Spain
Adjust: The infantry and cavalry units of the Force N.Italians Aus tria
may not move except to change their facings only. Poles Prussia < 1810
Artillery units of that Force may move normally, and White Die Prussia >18 11 All others
the sub-commander may move. Excellent 1 / 1.5 1
Atta ck ! The Force will, in this pulse, move in the Good 2 / 1.5 2-4 1-2
shortest possible path, toward the greatest number of Average 3 / 1 5-6 3-6
enemy units, with the goal of initiating combats with
them if at all possible. Units of the Force must move Colored Die (all nations) :
their full movement allowances toward the enemy, and Aggressive & (V) 1
the sub-commander should move so as to accommo- Aggressive 2
date his entire Force going over to the attack. No Personality 3-5
Cautious 6
5.0 Deploying Generals
The Napoleonic system of corps d'armees that was The white die will determine the general's control
ultimately adopted by most of the armies of the period number and radius multiplier. The colored die will
had clear advantages over the older "traditional" sys- determine whether the general has a personality rat-
tem. In Grande Armee we reflect this superiority by ing. Note that the ratings are all average to excellent.
allowing the commander of a Napoleonic army to sub- This is because the people we call "generals" represent
divide and "fine tune" the composition of his Forces, the best and most independent commanders in the
even in the midst of a battle. army: those capable of higher command. (The army is
A Napoleonic army can deploy a number of gener- full of generals, but these men are exceptional.)
als equal to half the number of Forces it has, rounded You should give your general a name. The orders
up. An army of five Forces could thus deploy three gen- of battle for the scenarios list the actual division com-
erals, while an army of two Forces would have one gen- manders in each corps, if you want to be accurate. The
eral, etc. These generals can be deployed anywhere in appendix also lists exceptional divisional commanders
the army; they don't have to be placed one per Force. If for each nation.
subsequent Forces arrive and increase the size of the
army, more generals can be deployed. 5.3 Uses for Generals
A general may be deployed to form a detachment, to
5.1 How to Deploy a General form a grand battery, or to replace a fallen sub-com-
The commander may deploy a general at the beginning mander.
of the control segment, prior to issuing any com-
mands. He spends 2CPS to deploy a general within his 5.31 Forming Detachments
radius, plus another lCP for each increment of 10" Sometimes the army commander needed to form an
beyond his radius. (There is no limit to the distance impromptu battlegroup to carry out a local task. These
from the army commander where a general may be troops might have to be pulled out of a standing corps.
deployed.) Any number of generals may be deployed in (Napoleon frequently did this with elements of his
a single pulse, subject to the cost in CPs for doing so, Guard whenever he needed a "fire brigade" to rectify
and up to the limit of generals available to the army. some local disaster.) In Grande AT7nee, this practice is
known as forming a Detachment.
5.2 Rating Generals The commander deploys a general, spends the
A general is a single mounted officer. On his base appropriate number of CPs, and declares that he is
should be a blank unit label, onto which you can write forming a detachment. He may choose any number
his command ratings. These are determined randomly and type of units from one Force to comprise the
at the moment you deploy him. Roll one white die and detachment, under the following guidelines:
one colored die, and consult the chart.
 CD
1) At the moment the general is placed on the
table, and the units of his detachment
declared, his radius is calculated, as for a nor-
mal sub-commander. The units designated
must already be within his radius.
2) The units designated for the detachment may
not leave the Force with fewer remaining
units than the newly-created detachment.
Example of Forming a Detachment:
The Austrian Reserve Corps has 16 units. This is a big,
unwieldy Force, and the Archduke Charles wants to
form a detachment so he can use the reserve cavalry
and horse artillery as a separate body. He declares
where he wants to deploy a general, measures to see
how many CPs it will cost him, and declares that he is
forming a detachment. He rolls: the white die comes
up 3, meaning this general will have a control number
of 3 and a radius multiplier of 1 . The colored die is a
4, meaning he will have no personality modifier.
He could choose up to 8 unitsfor this detachment
(up to half the Reserve Corps, ifhe wanted.) He selects
five units - three cavally and two horse artillery -
all of which are grouped in the same vicinity. They
will all have to be within 5" of the general, since his
radius multiplier is 1. (A 1 radius multiplier times 5
units equals a 5" radius.)
Charles now has a new Force in his army. He
must proceed with the pulse, giving out commands
and taking control tests, as he wishes.
5 .311 Detachments and th e
Command System
From the moment of its creation to the end of the day
of battle, a detachment acts like a Force, and its gener-
al is a new sub-commander. However, it does not
count toward the number of Forces in the anny when
rolling on the command table. (Nor would it raise the
number of Force, making the anny eligible for more
generals.)
In other words, a detachment represents an added
burden on the commander: it is another sub-com-
mander who need commands or will have to take con-
trol tests. There is no limit to the number of detach-
ments that can be created, but it would be unwise to
create too many of them. Because they require CPs to
manage, yet do not count as Forces when rolling on the
CP table, detachments spread the commander's abili-
ties thinly. And since they can't be "re-attached" on
this day of battle, they bog down the command ystem
if they proliferate.
The Control Segm en t
At the moment it is created, a detachment is con-
sidered to have received a command for that pulse.
(The CPs expended in its creation 'cover' its first com-
mand.) In sub equent pulses, however, it will have to
receive commands or take control tests.
Radonale for the CP & Command System:
As players, we generally micro-manage our forces. In games
where we supposedly represent army commanders, we still
make all kinds of little decisions that an army commander
would never make: the placement of skirmishers, when to
unlimber a specific battery, which target a particular infantry
battalion fires on, when to form square, etc. There is really
no way around this, given that there is only one player's
brain to encompass all the decisions that would have been
made historically by hundreds of different officers. Thus
we're never really in the head of the commanding general.
Instead, we're a conglomeration of dozens of different corps,
divisional, and brigade commanders, all psychically channel-
ing the commanding general.
Grande Annfe starts with the admission that we are
micro-managing our armies whenever possible. If you, the
army commander, devote CPs to issue commands to your
sub-commanders, that means that you are micro-managing
those particular Forces. You are paying close attention to
them, probably at the expense of paying attention to some-
thing else. (Some sub-commanders are easier to manage than
others, hence the different Control ratings.) If you choose to
let your sub-commanders act on their own, there is always
the possibility that they will do exactly what you want them
to do. This is renected by the control number. A more reli-
able general - by this definition - is a man who under-
stands and intuits your plans perfectly. Therefore, we allow
you to micro-manage his Force, even though you didn't issue
CPs to him. For this pulse, at least, he is doing exactly what
you hoped he would do: he sees the same problems and
opportunities that you see from Army H.Q., and he is
responding to them the way you would.
Finally, as the Archduke Charles learned, much to his
agony, there are never enough CPs to get all your sub-com-
manders on the same sheet of music, and the bigger the bat-
tle, the bigger a problem this becomes, as distance over-
whelms your ability to "think" for your sub-commanders.
Always remember that time is nexible in this game. If one
Force is inactive in a pulse, while another one is moving
quickly, that does not imply that these actions are happening
at the exact same times, or even requiring the same amount
of time to happen.
 The Control Segment
5-4 French Aides-de -Camp (ADCs)
In most armies, an Aide-de-Camp (AD C) was a well-
connected young man who hung around the com-
manding general, occasionally making himself useful
by carrying messages or running errands. Usually,
though, he was a toady whose parents had arranged for
him to have this cu hy assignment, rather than a dirty
and dangerous field command. Napoleon, however,
had a completely different system. French imperial
ADCs were seasoned, field-grade combat officers who
could take over formations as large as a whole corps in
the event of officer casualties.
When Napoleon is leading a French army, he will
have a supply of ADCs. If the scenario doesn't specify
how many, roll a die before the game. If the die comes
up 5-6, roll again until a number between 1 and 4 is
rolled. That will be the number of ADCs the French
army will have at" this battle.
5.41 Deploying ADCs
An ADC i an "extra" general waiting to be assigned.
Like other Napoleonic armies, the French get generals
based on the number of Forces in the army, but also
get ADCs. ADCs have special characteristics:
1) They all have a control number of 2 and a
radius multiplier of 1.5. There is no need to
roll the white die when deploying them. Roll
the colored die, as with other generals, to see
if they have a personality modifier.
2) ADCs may form detachments from any units
in any Forces in the army, or any combination
of Forces. (They still may not take more than
half the units from any Force, and the units
they form into their detachment must still be
within their radii when the detachment is
formed.)
Like a general, an ADC requires 2CPS to deploy,
plus 1CP for every 10" beyond the army commander's
radius.
Only Napoleon himself may deploy ADCs. If he is
not present with the French army, or ifhe is wounded
and/or removed from play, the French may not deploy
any more ADCs.
5.5 Grand Batteries
A grand battery is a Force, created by the army com-
mander, and consisting only of artillery units. Like a
detachment it does not count toward the number of
Forces in the army, when rolling on the Command
Table. A player may only create a grand battery if he
has an available general or ADC. Like any detachment,
a grand battery must remain as a separate detachment
CD
for the remainder of the day of battle. A player may
only create a grand battery once per game, and no
more than one grand battery may exist on a side. In
order to qualify as a "grand battery," this force must
comprise at leastfour artillery units.
5.51 Starting With a Grand Battery
An army commander may opt to create a grand battery
when he is setting up, before the game begins. He may
take the artillery units from any of his corps, anywhere
on the field. He may place these anywhere within the
army commander's radius, and then must place the
general or ADC who will be commanding the grand
battery. Calculate his radius based on his radius multi-
plier and the number of artillery units in the grand bat-
tery. He is now the sub-commander of this Force.
5.52 Creating a Grand Battery
If the commander does not create a grand battery
before the game begins, he may still do so during the
game. At the beginning of any pulse, the commander
may create a grand battery by placing his ADC or gen-
eral anywhere and spending the CPs, as per creating a
normal detachment. The artillery units that will com-
prise the grand battery would have to be within the
radius of the officer deployed as their commander.
During that fir t pulse in which it is created, all the
component artillery units must attempt to move so
they are in base-to-base contact with another unit
already part of the grand battery. During the time the
artillery units are moving, they don't have to be within
anybody's radius - the CP cost covers the orders to
them all to move to form a grand battery. However,
once declared as part of a grand battery, none of them
may fire until deployed base-to-base as a grand bat-
tery, except if taking final shots.
5.521 Grand Battery Restrictions
When created, a grand battery may not start within 16"
of any enemy units. All artillery units must b in base-
to-base contact, forming a contiguous line of artillery.
Once created, if the grand battery ever falls below
four artillery units, it is still a grand battery in all other
ways; it still acts as a Force.
5.53 Moving a Grand Battery
For a grand battery to move, none of its component
batteries may be marked as suppressed or having fired
in that pulse. (Exception: if the grand battery is entire-
ly comprised of horse batteries, it may ignore this
restriction.)
 CD
The grand battery will move as a single unit, rolling a
single die for movement and terrain, and paying the
cost of any terrain entered by any of its component
battries. Its movement allowance is based on the slow-
est unit in the grand battery.
If component units ofthe grand battery are driven
back or destroyed, then the remaining units "clo e up,"
reforming the continuous frontage.
5.54 Firing a Grand Battery
For every two units it comprises, the grand battery
may select o n e target. (A 9-unit grand battery could
thus have up to four different targets.) The grand bat-
tery is never required to split its fire - if all its units
are eligible to fire on a single enemy target, it may do
so. (God help them.) If it does split its fire, it may split
it any way it choo es, so long as the 2 unit / 1 target
allowance is observed.
5.55 Grand Battery Force Status
A grand battery behaves slightly differently than other
Forces if its commander is "On His Own." Take a Force
status check, like any other Force. But interpret the
results as follows :
Inactive: Same as any other Force: no movement
except the sub-commander.
Adj ust: The grand battery may move normally
under an "AdjusC order.
Attack: The grand battery may not move away
from visible enemy units, unless doing so brings it
closer to other enemy units.
6.0 "Attached" Officers
It was relatively rare for corps and army commanders
to become "attached" to individual units, although it
did happen. In an emergency, a general might escape
to cover in a friendly square, or ride in amongst his
cavalry troopers. At the scale we represent, though, we
have to assume that the officer in question is moving
around, exerting appropriate influence on local situa-
tions as he sees fit. We don't literally attach and detach
the officer base to units, but rather allow him to affect
things when he is close enough.
A sub-commander may exert the following influ-
ences on any unit of his Force within 3". He may do
each of these things once per pul e, all for the same
friendly unit, or spreading these activities out over sev-
eral different units.
1) He may re-roll a movement roll for a unit.
2) He may re-roll a terrain table roll.
3) If he has the (V)alor bonus, a friendly unit
within 3" may get a bonus die in combat.
The Control Segment
Doing these things is always voluntary. Each time the
sub-commander does #3, he must subject himself to
an officer casualty check.
6.1 The Commander's Influence
Proximity to the commander may confer certain bene-
fits. The commander is too busy to do the things listed
above, but he may contribute CPs to influence the rally
factor rolls of units up to half his radius away. (This
does not require him to check for officer casualty.)
7.0 Battles With More than One
Army on a Side
Some battles featured the presence of more than one
army on a side. At Waterloo, for instance, the Prussian
army steadily arrived throughout the afternoon. The
classic example is Leipzig, where Napoleon fought off
no less than four allied armies. In general, this only
works if there is a single army on one side, facing two
or more on the other side.
We shall call the multi-army side the "allied" side.
On the allied side, a player exists for each army com-
mander, but designate one player as the Commander-
in-Chief. This designation exists only for game purpo -
es, to designate which player will roll for initiative.
During the Command Phase, each army com-
mander on the allied side counts the Forces in his army
and rolls on the command table, as normal. However,
if the CinC rolls doubles during initiative rolls, then
each allied army commander gets extra CPs.
All the allied armies move during the same half of
the pulse. The CinC, if he wins initiative, will choose
when they move in the upcoming pulse.
8.0 Wing Commanders
Sometimes a large army was sub-divided into two or
three "wings," each comprising several Forces. This
was frequently the case in the Russian army, even after
they reformed to a Napoleonic system of permanent
corps. A wing commander's job was to manage a large
sector of the battlefield, theoretically simplifying the
management tasks of the overall army commander. In
reality, these were often political appointments - gen-
erals whose reputations and/or ranks were too high to
give them a single Force - resulting in yet another
layer of command.
In Grande Armee there are two ways to simulate
this, depending on whether or not an actual player is
present to play the role of the wing commander. Note
that in either case, the army commander still counts
the total number of Forces in his army, when using the
command table to see how many CPs he will have each
turn.
 The Control Segment
8.1 A Player as Wing Commander
The wing commander hould have his own cup to con-
tain CP chits. Each turn, after the army commander
has rolled to obtain his CPs, he must decide how many
CPs he will allocate to his wing commander. This is
kept secret from the enemy side. The army command-
er chooses a number of CPs to give to his wing com-
mander, then measures the distance between his fig-
ure and the wing commander's. If the wing command-
er is within the army commander's radius, then all the
CPs allocated are given to the wing commander. For
each ten inches the wing commander is beyond the
army commander's radius, one of the allocated CPs is
instead lost - going back to the pile. The army com-
mander should perform this task at the beginning of
each turn, for each wing commander he has that is
played by a player.
For example, Kutusou's radius is 20". Barclay de
Tolly is one of his wing commanders, and is 3'/ away.
Kutusou wants to giue Barclay 10 CPs, but because
Barclay is 1,/ beyond Kutusou's radius, two of those
CPs are lost en route. Barclay only gets 8.
Now we proceed to the control segment, as nor-
mal. However, the commander does not perform these
tasks for any of the Forces in the wing commander's
wing. The wing commander choo es which of his
Forces will receive commands, or will take control
tests, etc. The wing commander has a radius, equal to
the current visibility, and he follows the exact same
procedure for issuing command to his Forces as a
normal army commander would. (And when he runs
out of CPs, he can't issue any more commands.)
Note that the army commander is still the person
who uses CPs to move his base- a wing commander
doesn't have to spend the 3CPs to move his figure. And
the army commander is the only one who makes the
initiative rolls each pulse, and may employ CPs to alter
tho e rolls. And if the roll (doubles) results in more
CPs, these are kept by the army commander; they can't
be sent on to the wing commander. He must make do
with his "allowance" from the beginning of the turn.
8.2 If there is no Player for a Wing
Commander
As noted above, the wing commander has his own
radius, determined the same way as the army com-
mander's. And a wing commander will al 0 have a con-
trol number, like a sub-commander. When there is no
person playing the wing commander, the army com-
mander must follow this procedure:
Any command sent to a Force which is part of a
wing and within the wing commander's radius, goes
CD
instead to that wing commander. It is the wing com-
mander's control number that is u ed, plus his dis-
tance from the army commander, to determine the
cost in CPs.
For example, Barclay de Tolly is a Russian wing
commander. He has three corps under him. Kutusou
is the army commander. Visibility, and thus radius, is
20". If Kutusou wants to send a command to any of
Barclay's corps, he uses Barclay's control number (2),
and measures the distance to Barclay (3'/). Barclay is
1,/ beyond Kutusou's radius, so this command will
cost 2 extra CPs, for a total of 4. This will saue
Kutusou some CPs, as long as Barclay keeps all his
corps within his own radius. The wing commander
allows the army commander to extend his radius.
Note that this is usually, but not always, advanta-
geous. It is possible, for instance, that a Force might be
only 18" from the army commander, but part of a wing
whose wing commander is 27" away from the army
commander. Even 0, if the Force i within the wing
commander's radius, then the command must go to
the wing commander.
If, however, a Force is beyond the radius of its
wing commander, the army commander - if he wants
to send a command to that Force - must s nd it
directly to the sub-commander, as normal.
A sub-commander who doe not receive a com-
mand must take a control test, whether he is within his
wing commander's radius or not. In a control test,
always use the sub-commander's control number, not
that of his wing commander.
9.0 What if the Army Commander
Hasn't Arrived Yet?
Generally, Grande Armee works best for set-piece bat-
tles where the opposing forces are both deployed. But
what about those battles in which one Force got itself
into action, and the army commander rushed to the
scene with the rest of the army?
Until the army commander is on the board, each
sub-commander is on his own. The army commander
player still rolls for initiative for each pulse, but he col-
lects no CPs until he is on the table. (Thus, he can't
modify his initiative rolls). During the control segment
of each pulse, each sub-commander takes a control
test. Passing the test enables him to act with his Force
in any way he please. Failure of the control test will
require him to check his Force's status.
Once the commander arrives, he begins using the
command system normally, and all sub-commanders
are subject to commands, and to the normal rules of
the game.
 H. The Movement Segment
1.0 Random Movement Allowances
All units have a basic minimum movement allowance
(called "Base Move"), which is combined with a die
roll, to give a movement allowance for that pulse. A
player must roll for a unit and move it, before rolling
for another unit. He may opt not to move a unit, in
which case he should not roll for it at all. He may opt
not to move a unit the full distance it is allowed.
Players may always measure as they go.
2.0 Maneuver Systems
The myth persists among wargamers that nations 0
the Napoleonic wars recognized two distinct maneuver
systems, which they would have identified as
"Prussian" versus "French." In fact, every nation from
little Baden to mighty Russia had its own system for
maneuvering platoons, companies, battalions,
squadrons, etc, on the field, and many countries went
through several changes during this period.
At the scale of Grande Armee, we are concerned
with whole brigades of several battalions. So we need
to know only a bottom-line kind of distinction: who
was fa t and who was slow, relative to each other? The
French, for instance, had done away with many of the
time-consuming "evolutions" by company, and thus
changed direction and formation very quickly. (To pic-
ture this in your mind, consider the difference between
jay-walking and crossing the street 'correctly.') Rather
than using the labels "French" and "Prussian," we'll
call the distinction "Fast versus Slow."
Slow Infantry:
Austria, Prussia before 18 I I, Russia, Spain, Portugal
before I 809, Gennan minor states before I 809.
Fast InfantJy:
France, Britain (and British minor allies), Ottomans,
Prussia after 18 I I, and all others not yet mentioned.
H2.0: Movement Allowances
Type Base Move Plus
Foot Artillery and Fast Infantry 6 1 die
Slow Infantry 4 1 die
Light Cavalry 10 1 die
Horse Artillery and Heavy Cavalry 8 1 die
Officers * 18
You must spend 3CPs to moue the army commander.
Mortier gaue orders for them to retreat slowly, and
General Laborde, repeating his orders, exclaimed,
"Do you hear, soldiers? The marshal orders ordi-
nary time. Ordinary time, soldiers!" and amid that
incessant tempest of grapeshot and balls it was
"ordinary time" with them.
-The Young Guard at Krasnoi, 1812. (From:
Napoleon and his Marshals, Volume I, Chapter IX)
Notes on the Movement Allowances
Randomized movement allowances may not be a "realistic"
method, but they give a realistic result for a specific problem
commanders faced: getting multiple units to move in syn-
chronization. Despite all the tools for keeping men in time -
drums, music, singing, and endless training - this remained a
problem. Soldiers marched at more or less the same speeds,
from nation to nation. Where they differed was in tactical
"evolutions" for changing direction and formation. Nobody
was faster at changing formations than the French. A French
infantry battalion could change from line into SQuare in
about 90 seconds, or from SQuare into column in about 30
(!) seconds.
Contrast this with the desperately slow Prussians of the
revolutionary period: all of those evolutions meant that a
Prussian battalion took nearly eleven minutes to change from
column into SQuare. By 18 12 the Prussians had stripped
away most of their clunky evolutions, with miraculous
results. They were actually now a few seconds faster than the
French on some parade-ground maneuvers. The Russians
weren't as plodding as the 1806 Prussians, but they weren't
as fast as the French and British, either. The Austrians, with
their huge battalions, were a bit slower still. The Ottoman
Turks, with their loose formations and large numbers of
irregular infantry, tended to be quite fast and flexible, albeit
not well ordered.
Because Grande Armee does not use a rlXed time-scale,
there is also no such thing as a fixed movement rate. You
may find it Strange or unrealistic to have infantry occasional-
ly moving "faster" than cavalry, but bear In mind that we are
simulating time as well as speed. Perhaps the cavalry did not
Start moving at the same time. Perhaps its officers halted it
for some reason. Remember that cavalry moved at a "walk"
nineey percent of the time, saving a gallop for a few rare
charges. Generally, cavalry will be faster than Infantry, but
you can't always count on that.
 Movement m
3.0 Movement and Terrain
For each point of movement allowance, a unit may
move 1" in clear terrain. Non-clear terrain however
affects different unit-types in different wa;s. As with
the movement allowance themselv ,the effects of
terrain are randomized.
If any portion of a unit's base moves through
rough terrain or acro s an ob tacle, then the whole
unit must be considered a doing so.
3.1 The Terrain Table
When a player wi hes to move a unit through rough
terrain, or acro s an obstacle, he must roll on the
Terrain Table to determine the effect of that terrain for
this pul e. The player must always do it in this order:
First, he rolls for his movement allowance, as nor-
mal. econd, he announces his intent to move the unit
through the terrain in question. Third, he roll one die
and consults the Terrain Table. The table always gives
two numbers as po sible results, one odd and one
even, for each unit-type moving through rough terrain
or across an ob tacle. If the die comes up odd, u e the
odd number, and if even, u e the even number. That
number is the amount of movement points that must
be expended to move that unit I" through the terrain
(or completely acro s the ob tacle) during this pulse.
H3.1: The Terrain Table
Cost of
Type Rough Ob tacIe
Infantry 2-3 1-2
Cavalry 3-4 2-3
Artillery 3-4 3-4
Officers 1-2 1-2
Once having announced the move and rolled for it,
a player may not change his mind. He has to go
through with the move as best possible. A unit which
does not have enough movement points to clear an
obstacle may not do so. It halts behind the obstacle
ending its movement for the pulse there. ' not have to roll a die to move, but rather adds an auto-
A player must make a separate roll for each of his
units which tries to move through rough terrain or
acros an obstacle. He must do this each pulse, so it is
entirely po sible that a unit could move with great dif-
ficulty through a patch of rough terrain in one pulse,
and then in the next pulse get a better die roll, and
move faster through that very same terrain.
3.11 Obstacles
Note that the cost for moving across an obstacle is sim-
ply an additional expenditure of movement points
caused by the obstacle, plus whatever normal move-
ment would otherwise have occurred. The unit must
pay that number of points, plus whatever co t of the
terrain it is moving acro s. A unit must have enough
total movement points remaining to get its whole base
acro the obstacle; it can't end the pulse "sitting on"
the obstacle. So an infantry unit, for instance, would
have to spend the extra point(s) to cro s the obstacle,
plus at least three more to move itself across com-
pletely, since its base is 3" deep.
If moving acro san ob tacle which is aloin rough
terrain, a unit would have to have rolled twice on the
Terrain Table in this pulse.
Example of using the Terrain Table: The player rolls
for his mouement allowance this turnfor an infantry
unit, and comes up with "8". His unit has 8 mouement
points. He moues huo inches across clear terrain, and
now his unit has come to a stone wall - an obstacle.
He announces he will cross the obstacle and keep
mouing. He rolls a die, which comes up odd. That
means he will haue to pay an additional 1 mouement
point to cross this obstacle. So far he has spent huo
points mouing in clear terrain, and now another for
this obstacle, and he has fiue remaining. He crosses
the obstacle and moues another 5" straight ahead.
4.0 Roads
An artillery unit may move along a road at a standard
rate of 2" per every movement point expended, regard-
less of what other terrain may be in the area. A road
through rough terrain is still a road - not rough ter-
rain. Bridges and towns are "road ," for movement
purpo es.
Infantry and cavalry units move along roads at a
rate of I" per movement point, regardless of surround-
ing terrain.
In addition to the above, any unit which will move
entirely along a road in a pulse and never in that move
comes within 6" of any non-routing enemy unit, does
matic "6" to its base movement rate. A player who opts
to do this, rather than roll for movement allowance,
may not move that unit off the road in that pulse.
Due to the game's basing system, all the figures
may not fit on the road. Move with the base as centered
as po sible on the road. Also, because it is assumed
that a cavalry or infantry unit on a road is in "road col-
umn," no other unit may be within 3" of its rear. It
must have a 3" area behind it, representing the long
 4D M ovement
straggling columns of the road, if it is going to use the
road movement rate. (Artillery units on roads do not
have to do this.) It is assumed that, once off the road,
or once enemy units approach, the regimental colonels
will form the men up into a more practical battlefield
formation.
If the ground condition is "Mud," then a road con-
fers no bonus to any unit. It is instead Mud, like the
other clear terrain. For those rare occasions when a
road was fully paved, the players can agree before the
game, and ignore the effect of mud while on that road.
A "road" in the early 19th century was usually little more
than a muddy track, wide enough for a wagon axle. M ost
infantry and cavalry units marching along a road were actual
Iy marching along the sides of that road, because the road
itself was reserved for artillery, supply wagons and ambu
lances, and of course officers and couriers who would gallop
by, splattering everybody with mud. (Even most "paved"
roads in the Napoleonic era were cobblestone, which was
extremely difficult for horses to handle; they would stumble
and break their legs.)
5.0 Elevations
No battlefield is flat. The "hills" we place on the field
represent notable slopes which would disrupt or
impede movement in some way. Obviously, not all
slopes are the same, and going downhill could be just
as difficult as going up, especially for horses pulling a
two-ton artillery limber (the men have to set a brake to
keep it under control.)
The penalty for ascending or descending an eleva-
tion is one extra movement point. Whenever a unit
changes elevation in its move, it must subtract one
from its available movement allowance. If it moves
along clear terrain and then comes to a hill, it must
first subtract one. Then, with whatever amount of
movement is remaining, it may move up (or down) the
hill normally.
5.1 Cavalry and Elevations
Horses have great difficulty descending hills in a
straight line. Therefore, no cavalry unit may "charge
downhill." A cavalry unit may not move to contact with
the enemy if that means that the attacking cavalry
would have its base on a downhill slope at the time of
contact, or on a higher elevation than the enemy it is
contacting. (It could still be attacked by an enemy unit
coming up the hill, of course.)
6.0 Directions of Movement
Units may always move straight ahead. There are sev-
eral ways, however, that a unit may move in a different
direction.
6.1 Wheeling
Any unit may "wheel," thus turning as it moves, to face
a new direction. In this maneuver, the unit simply
moves around to a new facing, covering ground, as
shown by the arc of its movement. One front corner
stays in place while the other front corner "wheels" in
an arc, and the rest of the base swings around.
Measure the distance along this outside arc; that is the
amount of movement expended. Wheeling is simply a
function of movement - it is done during movement.
If the wheel carries the unit through different terrain,
it may require a roll on the terrain table. Any unit may
wheel any number of times, movement allowances
permitting. A unit may wheel bac1,-wards. A unit may
wheel into contact with the enemy.
6.2 Change Face
Any unit may make one "change of face" per pulse.
This maneuver involves pivoting the unit either 90 or
180 degrees, while not moving at all. The base is sim-
ply turned around to face a new direction. This was a
relatively easy maneuver for artillery or cavalry, but
trid.-y for infantry. An artillery or cavalry unit may do
this free, once, in any pulse, prior to expending any
movement points at all. Infantry may also perform this
once in a pulse: an infantry unit must change face first,
before expending any other movement points.
Changing face requires fo ur movement points if the
infantry unit is entirely in clear terrain or a town. The
unit can move normally with any remaining points. If
the ground is mud, or the unit is at least partially in
rough terrain, then changing face requires all of its
movement points. A unit may not change facing on a
bridge.
6.3 Retrograde & Flank Movement
Retrograding means moving backward while facing
forward. Flank movement means moving to one side
while facing forward. This is not to be understood lit-
erally; the men aren't side-stepping or walking back-
wards. Individual companies turn around, march, then
turn around again.
Artillery units may flank move or retrograde with-
out any penalty at all. Infantry and cavalry units retro-
grade and flank move at double the normal terrain
cost. In other words, whatever terrain they are moving
through costs twice as many movement points as
 Movement
Measure
the distance
covered by the
unit's outside arc
a it wheels.
Front
Wheeling
Rear
usual. (An inch of clear terrain costs 2 movement
points, rough terrain costs double whatever the
Terrain Table says, etc.)
No unit may ever retrograde or flank move into
contact with the enemy. 0 unit may flank move with-
in 6" of any non-routing enemy unit No unit may ret-
rograde within 6" of any non-routing enemy unit
unless moving directly away from enemy units without
getting closer to any other enemy units (i.e., retreat-
ing.) Any infantry or cavalry unit which retrogrades or
flank moves through rough terrain or across an obsta-
cle loses -lSP, to represent disorder and straggling.
No unit may use the road movement bonus rate while
retrograding or flank moving.
6-4 Oblique Movement
Any unit may move obliquely, up to 45 degrees off its
frontal perspective, without penalty. A unit may not
combine oblique movement with retrograde or flank
movement, or with the road bonus. An infantry unit
(not cavalry) may move obliquely into contact with the
enemy. A unit may not oblique in, from, or through a
town base.
As with the other maneuvers, don't take oblique
movement literally. It wasn't done by individual bat-
talions in the Napoleonic period. (Except briefly by the
Austrians.) Your men aren't really advancing, crab-
like, by inching forward at 45-degree angles. Rather,
the companies or squadrons are wheeling, moving for-
ward, then re-aligning.
0
Moving by Front
the flank
4:
Rear
Retrograde
Move
6.S Summary: Changing Direction
Wheeling:
Any unit may do so as a function of movement
Change Face:
Artillery or Cavalry: once, free, at the beginning of a pul e.
Infantry: once, at beginning of pulse, for four movement
points in clear terrain, or all movement points in rough
terrain or in mud.
Re tro/Flank Move :
Artillery: flank move or retrograde is free
Infantry and Cavalry: double cost to move.
Oblique :
Up to 45 degree, forward only, free. Infantry may move to
contact.
7.0 Towns / Built-Up Areas
Any unit may move through a built-up area, treating it
as a road, for purposes of movement, but cavalry and
artillery may not end their movement in them. Only
infantry units may start or end their movement in
built-up areas.
Remember that towns should be comprised of one
or more 4" square bases, with buildings that can be
removed when a unit occupies the base. Do not end a
unit's movement partially in and partially out of a town
base. If the unit does not have enough movement to
enter the town base fully, then it can't enter at all.

A unit may not wheel or oblique move in, from, or
through a town base. A unit may, however, change face
in a town base, and it may retrograde and/or flank
move in or through a town base.
8.0 Mud
When the ground condition is "Mud," most movement
co ts are doubled . Two movement points must be
spent to move 1" of clear terrain, for instance. The
penalties for terrain are doubled. Ascending or
descending a slope co ts an extra two movement
points, rather than the normal one. No unit may use
the road bonus in mud. A change of face requires all of
an infantry unit's movement allowance, not just four
points.
9.0 Doubled Movement Penalties
Movement penalties may only be doubled once. A unit
trying to retrograde move in the mud, for instance,
does not have its movement co ts doubled for retro-
grade, then doubled again for mud. The double-cost
penalty is only applied once.
10.0 Foot Artillery Penalty
A foot artillery unit which fires has its movement
allowance halved in that ame pulse. Roll for move-
ment, add to its base move, and then halve the total.
Note that this is done before applying any movement
penalties: a foot artillery unit might still have to pay
double movement costs for moving in mud, etc. (Make
sure to keep those cotton puffs on all your guns that
fired, so that when movement comes, you will remem-
ber whose movement is halved.)
11.0 Interpenetration
Units can never end a move overlapping each other's
bases. However, in certain cases a friendly unit may
move "through" another friendly unit, as follows :
First, Artillery units are the only units which may
interpenetrate and be interpenetrated by friendly
units. Infantry or cavalry units may move through a
friendly artillery unit as long as they have enough
movement to move completely through, and thus not
overlap the artillery unit's base at the end of their
moves. Artillery units may interpenetrate any friendly
unit under the same condition. Se cond, any unit,
friend or foe, may move through any routedfbroken
unit as if it weren't there. Thir d , any unit may move
"through" an officer, since officers are not units. No
other interpenetration of units is allowed.
Movement
Interpenetration may be done as a part of any per-
missible movement, including retrograde, oblique, and
moving by the flank. It may be done in rough terrain
and across ob tacles. In all ca es, normal movement
rules and penalties apply.
12.0 Contacting the Enemy
There is no "charge," per se. Units move into contact
with enemy units as part of their movement in a pulse.
Moving to contact an enemy unit is also called "attack-
ing" it. For simplicity, the side moving to contact is
called the "attacker" and the other side the "defender."
12.1 "Who May Contact Whom
Artillery units may never attack an enemy unit.
Infantry may attack any enemy unit, but it suffers a
penalty if attacking cavalry. (It is assumed that the
infantry has advanced toward the cavalry to attempt to
drive it off, which is very ri ky.) Ca aIry may attack
any enemy unit unless that unit is in a town or hard
cover.
12.2 How Units React "When
Attacked
Infantry does not react when contacted by the enemy.
If hit in the flank or rear by enemy infantry, it is
assumed that the brigadiers will try to tum some bat-
talions to face the threat. When infantry is attacked by
enemy cavalry, it is assumed that the brigadier in
charge is trying to form squares.
12.21 Cavalry Attacked by Infantry
Cavalry may opt to fight a combat when attacked by
enemy infantry. Tum the cavalry to face an infantry
attacker (if not already facing), and the combat will be
fought there. Alternatively, cavalry may Evade, when-
ever attacked by infantry.
12.21 Cavalry Attacked by Cavalry
Cavalry may opt to fight a combat when attacked by
enemy cavalry. Tum the cavalry to face the attacker (if
not already facing), and the combat will be fought
there. (A counter-charge is assumed to have hap-
pened.)
Alternatively, cavalry may attempt to Evade, when
attacked by cavalry. Unlike cavalry evading infantry,
this is not automatic. An attempt to evade enemy cav-
alry could result in combat anyway, but under disad-
vantageous circumstances, a one side pursues the
other. To make an evasion attempt against enemy cav-
alry, follow this procedure:
 Movement
To resolve an evasion attempt, the attacker and
defender each roll one die. The defender's die is modi-
fied as follows:
-1 if defender is heavy cavalry and attacker is light.
+1 if defender is light cavalry and attacker is heavy.
+2 if defender is Cossack, against any attacker
If the defender's modified roll is equal or higher,
then his cavalry has succe fully evaded. If the attack-
er's roll is higher, then there is no evasion: a combat
will take place. Turn the defender to face the attacker
(if not already), and the defender immediately 10 es
ISP, prior to resolving the combat. (If this breaks the
defender, the attacker may continue his move, and
even contact another defender if he is eligible.)
12.23 How Cavalry Evades
The attacking unit moves to contact with the cavalry.
The cavalry rolls for its movement allowance, as nor-
mal (base move plus one die), and then moves half that
number of inches as directly away from the attacker as
pos ible. (Simply move that distance backward,
regardless of terrain, while still facing the attacker.) If
an evasion would take a cavalry unit beyond its sub-
commander's radius, move no further than that radiu .
If an evasion would leave the cavalry "sitting on" other
friendly units, then move through those enemy units
and stop behind them. An evasion may not bring cav-
alry within 6" of other non-routed enemy units that it
wasn't already within 6" of before the evasion.
If an evading cavalry unit would have to move
through other friendly units in order to evade an
attacker, then it would cause the "Fall Back" p nalty of
-ISP to any friendly unit moved through. (See HIS.O
and Jl.l).
A cavalry unit may evade any number of times it is
attacked in a pulse.
If an evasion is not po ible due to the restrictions
Ii ted above, then it may not be done. Fight a combat
instead.
Once a defending cavalry unit has evaded, the
attacker may continue his move with any remaining
movement allowance, and contact another defender if
he is eligible, or even this same defender again, if clo e
enough.
12.24 Multiple Contacts
Once a unit is already contacted by the enemy, it is
locked in combat. It may not react in any way if
attacked by an additional enemy unit.
0
12.3 Attacking Artillery
When attacked, artillery batteries tried to fire cani ter
at the approaching enemy, then to limber up and
escape. If friendly infantry was nearby, the gunners
would often take shelter in the infantry formations.
The reaction of the artillery unit depends on whether
or not it is attached to a friendly infantry unit, as well
as what sort of enemy is attacking.
If the artillery is attacked by an enemy unit within
its frontal4s-degree perspective, then the gunners will
get one "final shot" at the incoming enemy. (See F7.0)
Then, after this is resolved, and the attacker is still in
contact, roll to ee if the artillery e caped.
If the artillery is attacked by an enemy unit com-
ing from the flank or rear, it will not get a final shot.
Roll to see if it escaped.
12.31 Artillery Escape
Cross-index the type of artillery trying to escape with
the type of attacker contacting it. Roll one die,
attempting to roll less than or equal to the number
shown on the Artillery Escape table, below. If the roll
fails, leave the artillery in place; there will be a combat
there. If the roll succeeds, the artillery has escaped.
H 12.31: Artillery Escape
A ttacker
D ef ender Infantry HvyCav. LtCav.
Ft. Artillery 3 2 I
Hs. Artillery 4 3 2
Modifie r s to Die Roll :
+1 in Mud, Snow, or Rain
+1 Artillery in rough terrain
-1 Artillery behind an ob tacle (such as a wall or ditch)
(It is possible, with enough modifiers in certain circum-
stances, to be unable to escape.)
12.311 Moving to Escape
An escaping artillery unit must move as directly away
from the attacker which contacted it as possible. As
with normal artillery movement, it may interpenetrate
friendly units as it escapes. Roll for its movement
allowance, as normal, but then halve that total. That
will be the distance it will fall back in its escape. If that
leaves it sitting on top of friendly units, fall back more
until the artillery does not overlap any unit. Ignore ter-
rain penalties - simply fall back that number of inches.

Example: A horse artillery unit is attacked by
enemy infantry. It must roll S4 to escape. It does so,
and now must see how far back it moves. Horse
artillery has a base move of 8 plus one die. It rolls a 3;
adding to 8, gives it an 11 movement allowance. Halve
that: the horse artillery unit willfall back 5-5".
If no escape path exists because of impassable terrain,
or if impassable terrain limits the artillery unit to a
horter escape path than that which was rolled, then
move as far back as possible.
12.312 Attacker Continue/Overrun
If the attacking unit still had movement points remain-
ing, and it contacted an artillery unit which escaped,
then it may continue its move, possibly contacting
another enemy unit. If it still has enough movement to
"catch" the artillery which just escaped from it, then it
has overrun that artillery unit: remove the artillery at
once, and stop the attacker's movement.
An attacking unit does not have to continue mov-
ing after an artillery unit escapes it. Continuing its
move is always optional, since it has accomplished its
immediate mission : driving off the enemy artillery.
12.313 Multiple Escapes
It is possible that an artillery unit may be contacted by
more than one enemy unit in a single pulse. For
instance, it might escape one enemy, then another
attacks it. It does not get a final shot at subsequent
attackers, but may still roll to escape. There is no
penalty for this, and the process is repeated each time
a unit is eligible to escape.
12.32 Artillery is attached to
Friendly Infantry
If artillery is attached (base-to-ba e and con-
tinuous frontage) to friendly infantry, there
will be no escape attempt. If the attack came
from the artillery's front, then take their
final shot at the attacker. The combat will be
between the attacker(s) and the attached
infantry unit. If the attack came from a flank
or rear, and the gunners couldn't get a shot,
then simply ignore them; they take shelter in
the infantry unit, and that combat is
resolved. Either way, the artillery unit will
share the fate of that infantry unit. If it is
broken, the artillery unit is destroyed. If the
friendly infantry survives the combat, no
matter how battered, the attached artillery .............----
unit survives unscathed.
fD Movement
12.33 Against two Artillery Units
Due to the smaller frontages of artillery units, it is pos-
sible that one attacker might contact two artillery units
simultaneously. Each rolls to fire, if eligible (if the
attack came from the front). Each rolls separately to
escape.
13.0 Moving Through Officers
If an enemy unit of any type moves through an officer,
that officer mu t take a casualty check. (J5.0) If he
survives, move him to safety. You may move him up to
his normal IS" movement distance.
14.0 Moving in the Presence of the
Enemy (The 6 " Rule)
There is a basic limitation on how your units can move
when close to the enemy. Non-routed units have a
"contact zone" which extends 6" in all direction . Once
an inf antry or cavalry unit enters the enemy's con-
tact zone it must move either directly toward or direct-
ly away from the clo est enemy units. If several enemy
unit are equidistant, the moving player may choo e.
Enemy units to the front take priority. Only if
there were no enemy units in the frontal arc and with-
in 6" would a unit be obligated to move toward or away
from the nearest enemy units on the flank or rear.
Note that this rule applies only if the unit moves.
You might elect not to move a unit.
Cavalry may ignore enemy infantry in a town; it is
never required to move only directly toward or away
from a garrisoned town base.
The 6" Rule applies whether or not your unit could
see the enemy unites) ; even, for instance, if concealed
behind a hill or in a forest.
The Austrian artillery above is attached to an infantry unit. The
French cuirassiers must attack them both as a single enemy.
 Movement
Note that you might start your move more than 6"
from the enemy, but once you've drawn within 6" you
mu t abide by the 6" Rule.
Artillery is exempt from this rule; it may maneu-
ver freely in the enemy's 6" zone.
In other words, once your units are within 6" of
the enemy, they are so clo e that their commanders
will turn them to face the enemy automatically, as a
basic precaution - unle s they are retreating, in which
case the commanders will get them away from danger
as expeditiously as pos ible. Once you have drawn that
close to the enemy, the time for maneuvering is over;
you are "stuck in," as Wellington would say.
Even if acting in accordance with your overall plan, a
brigadier isn't going to do something stupid, like marching
his brigade across the front of an enemy formation, so as to
catch a more distant enemy unit in the nank .... You might
be a warga mer looking for a + I modifier, but he's got
2, 500 young lives to worry about!
Infantry B
Infantry A
The cavalry can't pass by
infantry A, in order to attack
B. Unit A is the closest to
his front. If he is going to
attack anybody, it will be A.
0
14.1 Chaos and Friction: The
Rule, Part Two ...
When within the contact zone, your infantry and cav-
alry commanders might no longer be reliable. When
rolling for the movement of an infantry or cavalry unit
which st arts its move in the enemy's contact zone,
note this additional restriction:
H you r oll a 1 on the move die, this unit may not
move to clo e with the enemy, even if his movement
allowance would permit it. The unit may not move
closer to any enemy units, although it may move away
from the enemy. If any move, in any direction, would
bring it closer to the enemy, then it simply may not
move this pulse at all!
H you roll a 6 on the move die, this unit m u t
move to close with the closest enemy unit within its
frontal perspective. You may not choose an enemy unit
unless two are equidistant; it must charge toward the
closest one, even if terrain penalties ultimately don't
permit contact. You may not opt not to move this unit
after having rolled; it must charge the nearest enemy
to its front. If there are no enemy units within its
frontal perspective at all, then ignore this result.
Cavalry may ignore this result if it would force them to
"charge downhill" (HS.l) or attack an enemy in a town
or hard cover (H12.1)
Any other roll of the unit's movement die is treat-
ed normally. Note that a player does not have to make
the roll at all ifhe doesn't want to take any risks. Ifhe
wants his unit to hold its position, he may opt not to
roll, and thus not to move. But to move at all (even
simply to change facing) requires a roll, and thus the
risk of an uncooperative or hot-headed local brigadier
who acts against your wi hes.
Artillery units n ver suffer from these restrictions,
nor Guard or Elite units . They are always reliable.
This rule remains in place regardless of Force
Status. If, for instance, the Force must" Attack!" in this
pulse, but the player rolls a "1" for a unit, then that unit
still may not close with the enemy. (You can argue
about it later, at his court-martial.)
This rule does not apply outside the 6" contact
zone. If you roll a 1 or 6 for the movement allowance of
a unit that starts its move more than 6" from the
enemy, you may move with it freely, as you wish.
15.0 Forced Movement
Units which win or 10 e combats may have to move out
of the normal movement sequence of the pulse. They
might fall back as a result of losing a combat (Jl.o), or
they may pursue as a result of winning (I4.7).
 m Movement
Any infantry or cavalry unit that must fall back -
whether as a result of evading or falling back from
combat - which interpenetrates friendly infantry or
cavalry units, causes a -lSP loss to itself and any
infantry or cavalry units it falls back through (Jl.l).
Note that this is not the same procedure nor
penalty as when a unit breaks.
16.0 Moving Officers
Officers can move at any time during the Pulse, and
this should be done with care, so as to keep units with-
in their radii. Since you often don't know how fast
your units will be moving, it is probably best to move
officers last.
All officers may move up to 18". Unlike units, they
have no flank or rear and can move in any direction ;
their movement is always voluntary and reliable One
does not roll to move them; they can always mo~e up
to 18".
16.1 Moving the Commander
All officers may move freely except the army com-
mander. In order to move the commander, a player
must pay 3 CPs. This represents the effort of moving
the headquarters and staff and disrupting the circuits
of command during such a move.
17.0 Units and Radii
As we've seen, each sub-commander has a radius. All
units of his Force must remain within that radius by
the end of every pulse. A player may never deliberate-
ly end a pulse with units out of the radius, if that can
be prevented by moving tho e units or the sub-com-
mander in a different way.
Aside from remaining within the radius of their
sub-commander, units of a Force do not have to obey
other restrictions of command control. Brigades of the
sa~e division do not nece sarily have to stay together,
for mstance.
Most wargames allow the army commanders to roam the
battlefield without consequence. This was not common prac-
tice_ The best course of action for an army commander was
to find a good observation point, to set up his headquarters
there, and to stay put_ The army headquarters could be quite
an elaborate affair. At the very least, it had to function as a
nexus of information; couriers needed to know where they
could find the commander and chief of staff, and of course
any time spent moving was time that the commander could
not spend looking at maps, looking through his telescope,
reading and writing messages, etc. So moving the army head-
quarters was rarely done_
17.1 Penalties for Being Beyond the
Sub-Comrnander's Radius
Sometimes, as a result of combat, units might advance
or fall back out of their sub-commander's radius. The
player, at his first opportunity in the next pulse, must
move his sub-commander and the units of that Force
in such a way as to bring all units back within the sub-
commander's radius. Until this is accomplished, a unit
outside its sub-commander's radius i penalized as fol-
lows:
It uses lower To-Hit numb rs in combat
It may not make a skirmish attack
An artillery unit may not fire, other than to
make a Final Shot when attacked.
It may not recover any 10 t SPs.
But What About Divisional Integrity... ?
Most games place a lot of emphasis on unit integrity: all bat-
talions of a regiment must be within X" of each other, all
regiments of a brigade formed together, all brigades of a divi-
sion together, and they can't overlap other divisions, and so
on_ Wasn't this, after all, the way Napoleonic armies oper-
ated?
In cheory, yes. But once a battle was underway, these
tidy formations often became hopelessly jumbled and inter-
mixed. By the mid-point of most battles we find senior com-
manders grabbing units from each other's commands throw-
ing in a regiment from one division, a section of a' battery
from somewhere else, and some cavalry support, perhaps
from an entirely different corps.
There is also the problem of scale_ Because the units we
deploy represent historical bodies of men, and those bodies
vary greatly in size, there can be no standardized system for
placement, relative position, and integrity. In some cases a
unit represents an entire understrength division. In some
cases a big division might be four or five units. Unit integri-
ty is left to your brigadiers: you have to assume that they
know what they're doing and are putting their battalions
where they need to be. You will get the best results from
your brigades if you deploy them with secure nanks and
reserves behind them (there are potential combat penalties
for allowing the enemy too near an exposed nank_l
What matters in Grande Armee is that a sub-com-
mander can still "reach" his local brigadiers_ The radii of sub-
commanders sometimes overlaps, and thus units find them-
selves intermingled with the units of other Forces. This is not
terribly important, as long as the players pay attention to
which units belong in which Forces, and as long as each unit
stays within its Force's radius. Most armies started out neat-
ly divided by corps command, but became increasingly worn
and mingled as the day went on.
I. Combat
"...OUr skirmishers were pushed in by superior
numbers. In readiness for receiving cavalry we
changedjrom line into massformation, but the
grapeshot merely ploughed deeper gaps in our
ranks.
The Prussian infantry battalions were approach-
ing so close, thanks to their artillery support and
our immobility, that their mnks met ours, so much
so that a sergeant-major named Mourgue took
them to be French on account of their blue great-
coats which were like our own. He went unofficial-
ly to one of these battalions to warn them that they
were firing into their comrades and was very lucky
to escape being captured.
Our position was becoming untenable. Besides
the enemy artillery which was killing us at point-
blank range, an imposing force of cavalry waited a
mere twenty meters awayfor us to break, where
they would spring at us like tigers waiting for their
prey. Our companies were becoming more and
more disorganized, and very soon the battalions,
being crowded together, presented nothing more
than unformed heaps.... This could not last very
much longer. The instinctfor self-preservation
became too strong. The men broke andjled."
A French infantry captain at the Battle of Leipzig.
(from Digby Smith's 1813: Leipzig. (London:
Greenhill Books, 2001)
Historical Commentary
The above passage is a fascinating account of... what
exactly? Is it a melee combat? The units in question are
very close, after all. The enemy cavalry, he says, are
only twenty meters from him - that's one fifth of one
inch in our game- cale. Yet, the cavalry never
"charged." They just stood there, waiting for the
infantry to collapse, so they could pursue. As we can
see, the cavalry's main job was to keep the French in a
mass formation, so that the Prussian artillery could
blast them. But there is no melee. No contact. Even
though he hints that Prussian infantry are drawing
close enough to run over and talk to them, the confu-
sion is still such that he can't tell the Prussians are in
fact Prussians until one officer goes to greet them.
This passage is a good example of what this game
tries to represent when units come into contact. There
is no sense of time; we have no idea how long the
Frenchmen were under fire, or how quickly the
Prussians were approaching. Our captain never looked
at a clock, or at least didn't remember looking at one.
There is no "charge," per se. There is only the sense
that units of men have drawn close together, that fric-
tion and violence are occurring, and that sooner or
later somebody will have to break, or at least fall back.
1.0Grande Armee's Approach to
Combat
At the large scale we use in this game, we must assume
that tactical decisions are made by the captains,
majors, and colonels on the scene. Formations within
even a single brigade might change two or three times
during the course of what this game represents as one
"combat." There might be charges and countercharges,
volleys of musketry at point-blank range, and perhaps
one side drives home a charge with cold steel. But back
at army headquarters we strain and squint through our
telescopes, seeing only that our boys are mixing it up
with the enemy. Far away, obscured by smoke, terrain,
and other troops, these combats are occurring well
beyond our control.
There is no distinction made between melee, mus-
ket fire, and the supporting fire of attached brigade
and divi ional artillery. All of this is assumed when
units make contact, and it is all called "combat."
2.0 Moving to Contact
The player who is moving his units is called the
Attacker. The player who is not active in that part of
the pulse is the Defender. There is no "charge." The
attacker simply moves, announcing his intention to
move units into contact, and then doing so, assuming
the die rolls cooperate. At this time, as they are con-
tacted, defending units must react, if they are eligible:
cavalry might evade (unless already contacted by
another attacker), and artillery must fire a Final Shot
(if eligible) and try to escape.
2.1 Direction of Contact
An attacking unit may only move into contact using its
front. It may never move backwards or sideways into
contact with the enemy.
An attacking unit need not be able to see a defend-
ing unit at the beginning of its move, in order to attack
it. For example, attacking cavalry might move around
a hill and be able to see a defending infantry unit which
had previously been invisible due to the hill. Assuming
the cavalry unit obeys the 6" Rule, it may move to con-
tact this infantry.
An attacking unit may contact a defender's flank
or rear, but only if it obeys the restrictions to attack the
closest enemy to its front (See AS.o, H14.0 , and 12.2,
below.)
Tum a defending unit to face its attacker. (If a sec-
ond attacking unit contacts him, the defender is
'pinned' and doesn't tum again, and is thus hit by the
second unit in the flank or rear.) In other words, there
is never a one-on-one flank or rear attack.

2.2 Closest Enemy to Your Front
Once within 6" of the enemy, an attacking unit must
contact the closest enemy unit to its front. If two
defending units are equidistant from the attacker's
front, the attacking player may choose. If it is unclear
which enemy unit is closest to a unit's front, review
RuleA8.0.
2.3 Squaring Up
Although units will usually contact each other at some
sort of angle, players should "square up" the attacker's
base once contact is made, so that the attacker and
defender's bases are evenly in contact, and not in con-
tact with any other unit. Thi makes it much easier to
tell, in complex situations, which units are contacting
which, and who may advance in what direction, etc. In
a tight situation with many units, it might happen that
by squaring up, you inadvertently swing your flank
around into contact with somebody else. If there's no
way to square up without doing that, then square up as
best possible without contacting any other enemy
units.
..
Ist: French I attacks Front
Prusslan A on Its Flank.
~0~
on
0~
Front
<>~
2nd: Note that French I on
Is mosdy on Prusslan A's
flank.
~ tles. The most important thing for an attacker was to main-
3rd: Prusslan A turns to fxe Its Flank
all.lCker, while French I squar~ up
rn ~
to perfectly contact A's base.
(If there were another French unit,
now elieible to attxk A, It could do
so, on A's flank or rear.) Flank
o Combat
2.4 Multiple Contacts
An attacking unit may only move to contact with one
defending unit. No more than one attacking unit may
contact anyone side of a defender's base. The attacker
may ultimately move a second of his units into contact
with that same defending unit, but only if it can contact
the defender in the flank or rear. For each instance of
combat, there may be only one defending unit.
(Exception: see rules for artillery, 13.0 and 13.1.) No
more than two attackers may contact the same
defender. Thus, a combat may consist of one attacker
versus one defender, or two attackers versus one
defender.
Allowed: Up to two allxkers per Not Allowed: No more than one
defender. This Is a flank all.lCk. all.lCker on a defender's side.
25 Contact and Obstacles/Cover
If a defending unit is directly behind an obstacle, the
attacker need not have enough movement to clear the
obstacle; he need only be able to move into base-to-
base contact with the defender. The obstacle (a wall,
for instance) will be between them, giving the defend-
er a bonus in this combat. It will count as either hard
or soft cover, depending on what it is.
Why Are the Contact Rules SO RestrlctJve?
Wargamers traditionally try to "gang up" several attacking
units against one defender, but this rarely happened in bat-
tain good order, and this would be lost if units crammed
together, making tactical maneuvers impossible. Second,
remember that at our scale, when two of our brigades come
into base-ta-base contaCt, what we are really representing is
a kind of showdown between multiple units, with infantry
probably deploying from colums into lines, delivering vol-
leys, and cavalry trying to ride around infantry squares,
and/or around and through enemy cavalry squadrons. The
attacker simply can't bring any more forces to bear than 2-
I odds; the battlefield is too crowded. And even then he can
only bring 2-1 odds if the defenders flank or rear is com-
pletely exposed. In other words, if the defender is doing
what he is supposed to be dOing, and deploying his units with
supported flanks, then all combats will be grueling I: I
slugfests. That may not be as much fun as the way other
games let you do it, but that's the way it was in the
Napoleonic Wars.
 Combat
3.0 Artillery Units in Combat
Becau e of the smaller frontages of artillery units, it is
possible for an attacker to have contacted two artillery
units. If neither has escaped, then combine their dice
as if they were one defending unit.
Remember that if the enemy attacked from the
artillery's front, the artillery will get a final shot prior
to checking for escape. If the artillery did not escape,
then there will be a combat.
3.1 Attached Artillery in Combat
An artillery unit may be deployed in base-to-base con-
tact with a friendly infantry unit, so that their fronts
combine to form a contiguous line. This is done a part
of movement, by moving the artillery and infantry so
that they end their moves together in this fashion. Only
one such artillery unit may ever be thus Attach ed to
anyone infantry unit. Artillery, even horse artillery,
does not attach to cavalry. Artillery may only attach to
infantry, as follows:
1. If the artillery unit is part of a grand battery, it
may not attach to any infantry unit at all.
2. An artillery unit may only attach to an infantry
unit in its same Force.
3. Remember that artillery may never move to con-
tact with the enemy, so attached artillery may
only ever be attached to a defender.
An attacker who charges an attached artillery unit is
also charging the attached infantry unit. If the attack
comes against the artillery's front, then a final shot
may be taken. Regardless of which dir ction the attack
comes from, an attached artillery unit will not try to
escape; the gunners will take shelter in the friendly
infantry unit. The defending infantry unit does not get
any extra SPs (since the gunners are getting out of the
way, not fighting). The artillery crew will share the fate
of the attached infantry unit: if it is broken, the
artillery unit is destroyed. If the friendly infantry sur-
vives the combat, no matter how battered, the attached
artillery unit survives unscathed. If the infantry falls
back, the artillery falls back with it, still attached.
3.2 Combat Versus a Grand Battery
A grand battery is simply a collection of several
artillery units. If attacking a grand battery, move
attacking units against the enemy artillery units, with
each defending artillery unit eligible to shoot and/or to
escape, as normal. It is likely, if attacking the front of a
grand battery, that an attacking unit will contact more
than one defender, because of the different frontages
involved. Try to square up these melees as neatly as
0
possible so that each attacker contacts as few as po i-
ble defenders. But in the end, simply add together the
SPs of all defenders against that attacker.
4.0 Procedure for Combat
1. An attacking unit moves to contact a defending
unit. Cavalry might try to evade.
2. If the defender is artillery, he may get a shot at
the attacker, and/or might e cape (meaning
there is no contact.) Determine this.
3. Turn to face the attacker, if necessary. Another
attacking unit may contact this defender, if eli-
gible.
4. The attacking side keeps moving, repeating this
procedure as more of his units continue to con-
tact more defending units.
Then, once there are no more attacking units to move,
combats are re olved one at a time, starting at one
side of the board (attacker's choice) and moving down
to the other side. This order must be obeyed! The
attacker can not "plan" the order of combat resolutions
to try to get a more advantageous situation (see 14.32).
Each combat is re olved in this fashion:
1. The attacker adds together the SP of his
attacking units. If there are two attacking units,
the attacker must designate which one is the
"Dominant Unit."
2. Each side grabs a handful of dice equal to the
amount of SPs they have in the combat.
3. Each ide may get bonu dice.
4. Each side throws all the dice it has, hoping to
score Hits. Each Hit scored will cause a 1SP
loss to the enemy side. Under certain circum-
stances, one or both sides may be eligible to
make Saving Throws to negate hits.
5. The side which has scored the most hits has
won the combat, with ties won by the defender.
4.1 Designate the Dominant Unit,
if Appropriate
If the attacker has more than one unit in the combat,
he must designate one as the Dominant U nit. It
must be the unit which has the higher SP strength. If
there is a tie, and one unit is cavalry and one is
infantry, the cavalry unit will be dominant. If both
attacking units have the same SPs and are of the same
type, the attacker may choose. The dominant unit is
the one which will bear the brunt of most of the losses.

4.2 How Many Dice to Roll
In the combat, each side will roll a number of dice
equal to its total SPs. Plus, either side may be eligible
for Bonus Dice. A sub-commander with the Mal or
bonus within 3" of the dominant unit may give a bonus
die. He may only do this for one friendly unit per pulse,
and doing so will force him to take an officer casualty
test. Also, any side gets a bonu die for each mixed
brigade (MX) it ha in the combat. (Exception : A MX
unit does not get its bonus die if it is in a town or forti-
fication.)
Example of this step :
The French haue managed to attack the British from
both front andflank. A French caualry brigade (sSPs)
and an infantry brigade (SSPs) are attacking a
British infantry brigade (BSPs) with an attached
artillery unit. The British are protected by soft couer.
(The French attack, the artillery unit takes its Final
Shot, but does no harm to the French. Then the gun-
ners runfor couer within the British infantry unit.)
Since both French units haue SSPs, the caualry
will be dominant. Neither side get any bonus dice.
Thus: the British roll B dice, and the French roll 10.
4.3 How to Score Hits
Both sides roll all their dice. The goal is to score Hits.
Infantry and cavalry units score hits on rolls of
four or higher. However, certain circumstances can
modify the dice rolls, making it harder to hit. A unit
mu t subtract one pip from each die roll for each of
the following criteria that applies to it:
A It is Vulnerable (It is on a bridge, or fording a
river.)
B. It is Flanked (a non-routed enemy unit is within 3"
of its flank or rear)
c. It is fighting a combat against combined arms
(both infantry and cavalry units.)
D. It is outside the radius of its sub-commander.
E. It is infantry attacking cavalry.
Artillery units in combat only hit on rolls of 6.
4.31 To-Hit Numbers
For each of the above, the unit must subtract one from
its rolls, although no matter how many of these nega-
tive criteria apply, ixes are alway hits. If the
attacker has two units in the combat, the e criteria are
applied to each attacking unit eparately. (Thus one
attacker might hit on rolls of 4-6, and the other might
hit only on rolls of 5-6. Dice in different colors will be
useful here.)
o Combat
4.32 "Flanked"
As combats are resolved, units may fall back or
advance, and a unit may find itself suddenly flanked :
it has not yet resolved its combat, but a friendly unit
nearby has retreated, and an enemy unit i now on its
flank. In this case, it is indeed now flanked, and suffers
the to-hit penalty accordingly.
Remember, however, that the attacker - before
resolving any combats - must choo e one side of the
board, and resolve his combats strictly in order moving
from that side to the other side. He may not otherwise
plan or arrange the resolution of his combats to make
uch advantages more likely.
A unit in a town or other hard cover i never
flanked , nor may it be considered as flanking an enemy
unit. (It is holed up in the town, not maneuvering in
the field as a threat to the enemy.)
4.321 Who is Flanked?
In order to "flank" your unit, the majority of an enemy
unit's base must lie behind your unit's front:
-------88--
B
Fr sfront
On the left, Au trian unit Al is within 3" of the French
flank, but most of Al's base is not behind Fr's front.
Thus, Fr is not flanked.
On the right, however, mo t of Al's base falls
behind Fr's front line, and is within 3" of his flank.
Thus, Fr is flanked .
Note that this does not in any way change rule
AB.o. You still need to use AB.o to detennine when an
enemy is "to your front" or "to your flank," when mov-
ing (the 6" Rule), when firing artillery, skinnishing,
and in many other cases.
4.33 Infantry in "Squares"
An infantry unit attacked by cavalry (even if also
attacked by infantry in the same combat) is considered
to be in Square . (Not one big square, but most or all
of the battalions of this unit are in squares.)
Infantry in squares are never flanked . They would
suffer a -1 pip in combat if attacked by combined arms,
but not an additional -1 pip for being flanked , since
squares have no open flanks.
Infantry in squares never fall back if they lose a
combat (see J1.o). Instead, they hold their ground
while the attackers (even if tho e attackers "won" the
combat) fall back. In other words, the only way to beat
a square is to break it.
 Combat
4-4 Saving Throws
Once both sides have rolled and counted how many
hits they scored against the enemy, the fi nal step is to
check to see if either side receives any Saving
Throw.
For each of the followi ng criteria that applies to a
unit, that unit receives one Save Number. Again, if
there are two attacking units, each attacker might have
a different save number, based on its individual crite-
ria. (Note that these are not the same numbers as sav-
ing throws for artillery fire!)
1 if this is an infantry or artiUery unit (not cavalry)
on a higher elevation than the enemy
2 if this is a cavalry unit saving against an infantry
unit in the rain
2 if this is a heavy cavalry unit saving against hits
scored by light cavalry
2 if this is a unit protected by oft cover
4 if this is a unit protected by hard cover
Add together all the criteria which apply to your
unit(s). (For example, an infantry unit on a hilltop,
protected by soft cover, would have a save number of
3.) A unit's Save Number may never b e greater
than 5.
Then, take a number of dice equal to the number
of hits the enemy scored against you in the combat,
and roll, hoping to roll equal to or Ie s than your
ave number on each die. For each successful save,
one hit on your side is removed.
Let's continue with our previous example:
The French cavalry and infantry units roll 10 dice,
and the British injantly rolls 8 dice. The French will
hit on rolls of 4 or higher, but the British, who arefac-
ing a combined arms attack, need rolls of S-6 to hit.
The French roll and score S hits. The British roll
and score 3 hits. But now it's time to see if anybody
gets a saving throw. The French don't meet any sav-
ing throw criteria, so the French side won't get any
saves. But the British unit is protected by soft cover.
So that's a Save Number of2. The British can take jive
dice for saving throws - one die for each hit on them
the French had scored. For each of those dice that rolls
a 1 or 2, the British remove a hit.
As it turns out, the British get lucky and roll two
ones. So two of their hits disappear. Final result of the
combat: the British score 3 hits, the French score 3.
4.5 Applying Losses
Now we apply tho e hits to both sides. Remember that
each hit against a unit reduces it by lSP, and once a
0
unit reaches zero SPs, it is Broken. In a simple one
versus one combat, it is easy to apply the hits. But
when one side has more than one unit involved, hits
mu t be applied in the following manner.
4.51 Dividing Hits Between Two
Attacking Units
The fir t two hits are applied against the dominant
unit, then one on the other unit, then two more on the
dominant unit, then one on the other, and so on in a 2-
1-2-1-2-1.. . fashion until all hits are applied. If the
dominant unit is broken, aU remaining hits apply to
the other unit.
Continuing with our example:
Neither side breaks, and the number of hits was the
same for both sides. This is a utie," which is always
won by the defender, so the British won this combat.
Thus, the British artillery unit is unscathed. The
British infantry absorbs all three French hits. It start-
ed with 8SPs, and it now has US" written on its roster.
The French suffered three hits. Thejirst two go on
the cavalry, since it's the dominant unit, then one on
the infantly. Thus, the cavalry had started with sSPs,
and are now down to 3SPs. The French infantly unit,
which had also started with SSPs, took one hit, and
thus has 4SPs left.
4.52 SP Loss
When we speak of hits "scored" against the enemy, we
mean after any attempt at a saving throw. So if you
score 6 hits, but then the enemy saves 2 of them,
you've really only scored four hits on the enemy.
A unit never ha negative SPs. As soon as losses
reduce its SPs to zero, it Breaks.
4.6 Who Won the Combat?
In the simplest sense, whichever side scored the mo t
hits "won" the combat, with ties always going to the
defender. Normally, when an attacker wins the com-
bat, his dominant unit must advance to occupy the
ground formerly held by the defender. There are
four possible outcomesfrom a combat:
4.61 One Side Is Broken But The
Other Side Isn't
The side which breaks has lost the combat. If the
defender broke, then the attacker must move his dom-
inant unit to occupy the defender's ground, if possible.
If the attacker's dominant unit breaks, then another
attacking unit (if there is one) may occupy the ground.

Remember that it is possible for an attacker to
have up to two units on his side in the combat. For the
attacking side to have broken, all attacking units must
break.
4.62 Neither Side is Broken But
One Side Scored More Hits
The side which scored the mo t hits wins the melee. If
the attackers lost, they must fall back, and the defend-
ers hold their position. If the defenders lost, the
defending unit must fall back, and the attacker's dom-
inant unit must occupy the defender's ground, if possi-
ble. If the dominant unit is broken, but the attacking
side till won and still has an unbroken unit, that other
attacking unit may advance to occupy the ground.
4.621 Defender in Squares
Remember that a defender in quares must break in
order to be considered "defeated" in melee (14.33). If
the attacker wins the combat but doesn't break a
defender in squares, then he hasn't really won. In thi
instance, all attacking units fall back 3".
4.63 Nobody Scores Any Hits, Or
There Is A Tie And Nobody Breaks
In this case, the defender has won. All attackers must
fall back.
4.64 Everybody Breaks
It is possible, albeit statistically unlikely, that both
sides will break in the combat. This represents a melee
which has completely chewed up both sides to the
point where there are no effective formations left in the
vicinity. Both sides break, leaving a stream of chaos,
stragglers, scattered firefights and pockets of resist-
ance in their wake.
Remember that if an attacker has more than one
unit in the combat, both his units would have to break,
for the attacking side to have broken.
A n example of combat r esolution: A defending
infantry unit scores only three hits, while the attack-
ers score five. However, those three hits are enough to
break the attackers, while the defending unit is still
there. Consequently, with no attackers left, the
defender wins the combat, even though he had scored
fewer hits.
4.7 Advance After Victory
A victorious defending unit never advances after com-
bat; it holds its po ition. A victorious attacking unit
mu t advance to occupy the space left by the defender
who fell back or routed .
o Combat
An advancing unit which is partially blocked by
other friendly or enemy units must advance as far as
possible to occupy the vacated ground, without con-
tacting any other units.
An advance that carries the attacker into rough
terrain, a town, or across an obstacle does not involve
any movement penalties: the momentum of victory
has carried the position.
5.0 Combat Involving a Town
If a defending unit is in a town, and must fall back,
then it must fall back completely out of the town base
it had occupied. The victorious attacker will occupy
that town base. Remember that cavalry may not attack
a town.
If, however, the defending unit is prevented from
falling back completely out of the town base (by, for
instance, impassable terrain), then the defending unit
loses another ISP instead. (It remain holed up in the
town, unless that one more SP 10 s caused it to break.)
The attacker's units fall back 3". (They are regrouping
for another attempt to storm the town.)
6.0 A Complex Combat Example
It is the Au trian phase in the pulse. Austrian units 1,
2 , 3, 4 have French units A, B ,C, D within 6" of their
fronts at the beginning of their moves.
Austrian 1 will attack French A; this is a clear-cut com-
bat with no modifiers. Austrian 2 , however, is flanked
by the presence of French C. Austrian 2 can't turn to
strike C, because a unit must always contact the closest
enemy to its front. Thus - if it attacks - it must charge
French B, and will be flanked in the process. Austrian
3 will attack French C. Here, the French are flanked
because of Austrian 2 on their flanks.
And what about Austrian 4? He would very much
like to wheel and take French C in the flank, but most
of French C's base is actually to his flank, not his front.
Remember that units within 6" of one s front take pri-
ority (H14.o). Thus, if Austrian 4 attacks, it must
attack French D, who is clo est to his front. In fact,
Austrian 4's best move is no move at all. He will stay in
reserve, rather than placing himself in jeopardy of
being flanked in the next French pulse.
 combat.

Radonale for the Combat Rules

During the playtesting, all sorts of circumstances of combat
were tried out. There were arguments, for instance, that cav-
alry should fight at a severe disadvantage in the woods (rid-
ers getting unhorsed by tree limbs) or in a swamp (two thou-
sand pound horses sinking into the mud). But upon renec-
tlon, infantry and artillery would certainly be at equal disad-
vantages defending against cavalry in a forest or marsh, due
to the inability to make tight formations, or the trees block-
ing fire. So the ultimate decision was to make "rough" ter-
rain difficult on everyone more or less equally, by giving sav-
ing throws to any side which is in such terrain.
Some players commented that the combat system was
very "bloody." Especially in the case of cavalry charges, in
which casualties were historically light, the Grande Armee
system seemed awfully lethal. First of all, bear in mind that
"combat" in this game refers to several activities, performed
by several units, over a variable period of time: musketry vol-
leys at close range, the canister fire of the attached brigade
and divisional artillery, and finally the charge itself. In most
games, those are all different resolutions, each causing a cer-
tain number of casualties.
Second, remember that "hits" are not necessarily
"kills." In most games, hits don't come back. In Grande
Armee, however, they represent the temporary weakening
of a unit; hits can be recovered. There is always the possibil- Who says the Allies have no heroic leaders?
ity that a broken unit will not recover, and will disintegrate, Above: a brilliant mind and great spirit trapped in a frail
but there is also the possibility that this combat in which it body: the Archduke Karl (Charles), Austria's best com-
suffered so heavily was simply a setback, and with rest the mander. Below: Prince Peter Bagratlan, the fearless and
unit can return to fight again, albeit with reduced vigor. dashing Russian commander who met his end at Borodino.
If the combat seems too abstract to be "Napoleonic,"
remember this: All game rules ask you to resolve things
whenever chance intersects with your decisions. For instance,
if you make a cavalry charge, then you might check your
cavalry's morale (roll a die), then the target unit's morale
(roll a die), then to see if the target unit formed SQuare (roll
a die). If yes, then will your cavalry break that SQuare, or ride
around it, or recall? (roll more dice.) What will be the casu-
alties? (roll more dice.) Will you have to check morale again
afterwards? (roll yet more dice.) Grande Armee trusts a sin-
gle fistful of dice on each side to "resolve" all of these things
in a single moment. If you roll a lot of ones and the defend-
ing infantry rolled a lot of sixes, then your charge failed for
any or all of the above reasons. Far away at the army head-
quarters, you really wouldn't have much more knowledge
than that, anyway. You would ask only: did our boys break
the enemy SQuares, or were they repulsed?
If you need to go through all those steps in order to feel
that you're really playing "Napoleonics," well, sorry. I guess
this isn't the game for you.
As army commander, you make the big decisions, then
you place your trust in the skill of your subordinates. And
then, frankly, you hope for the best.
 J. Things Fall Apart
(Falling Back, Routing, Officer Casualties, and other Friction)
1.0 Falling Back
As a result of losing a combat, a unit will Fall Back,
retreating, still under the control of its officers,
although probably a bit shaken. Resolve each fall back
as it happens - after resolving the combat which
caused it. Then move on to resolving the next combat.
The units of the losing side calculate the difference
between the number of hits they scored and the num-
ber the winners scored on them. For example, if the
losers scored 2 hits, and the winners scored 5, then the
difference is 3. The fall-back distance i 3" plus
the SP los difference.
A unit that must fall back is moved as directly
away from its enemy in this combat as possible, with-
out moving closer to other non-routing enemy units, if
possible. This is a special kind of movement that does
not account for terrain, or direction, etc. The distance
of the fall-back is determined, and then the player
measures, and simply moves the unit this new dis-
tance, still facing in the direction of the enemy from
this combat.
1.1 Falling Back Penalties
A unit which falls back as a result of combat might
have to fall back "through" friendly units. If its fall-
back distance would result in it overlapping friendly
units or obstacles, then keep falling back until it has
enough open ground to stop. Do the same with obsta-
cles: don't leave a unit "sitting on" an obstacle as a
result of a fall-back. Keep falling back until it clears the
obstacle. Obviously, this means that units might fall
back much more than their initial intent or die roll
would indicate.
If a unit must fall back through rough terrain or
across an obstacle, it suffers an additional lSP loss.
(This might, of course, break it, at which point its "fall
back" becomes a rout, instead.)
If there is no path open for a unit to fall back,
except by moving through friendly infantry or cavalry
units, then the falling-back unit and every friendly
infantry or cavalry unit thus interpenetrated suffers an
additional -lSP loss. (Note that artillery may always
interpenetrate and be interpenetrated by friendly
units, and this penalty does not apply to artillery.)
If a unit can't fall back the entire distance it is
required to, due to the presence of enemy units or
impassable terrain, then it falls back as far as it can. If
it can't fall back at least 3" then it loses another lSP.
An example of falling back: A French infantry
unit has lost a combat. It scored 2 hits, but the British
scored 6 hits. So it lost by a difference of 4. It must
fall back 3 + 4for a total of 7'.
When you moue up into combat, nothing is more
discouraging to young soldiers than the remarks of
wounded men straggling to the rear.
- Memoirs of Elzear Blaze
2.0 Where are the Morale Checks, Disorder,
Fatigue, and all that stuff ?
Most games assign a unit a strength value based upon sheer
numbers, then a morale rating based upon that unit's Quali-
ty, and then have special markers to desginate whether or
not a unit has become disordered, or fatigued, or is suffering
from some other malady. By this point you have noticed that
Grande Armee has none of this. A unit's Strength Points
(SPs) are the measure of its effectiveness under all circum-
stances. Period. If this seems like a cop-out or gross over-
Simplification, then please bear some things in mind:
First, the unit's historical numerical strength is divided
by a divisor corresponding to its morale class. This process is
explained in detail in Appendix One, so that you can design
your own units for your own scenarios. The result of this
division is then added to any bonuses for attached artillery
units. Thus, a unit's SPs reflect: a) actual historical numbers,
not some generic game unit, as in most rules, b) the unit's
morale class, and c) the presence or absence of attached
divisional, brigade, or regimental artillery. Rather than going
through the steps of checking for casualties, then checking
morale, etc., Grande Armee rolls it all up into one. And it's
no longer the brittle either/or system of morale checks, but
rather a continuum of strength, as each unit's SPs wax and
wane.
Second, ask yourself what "Disorder" usually means in
wargame parlance. In the horse-and-musket period, where
tight unit cohesion was crucial, it usually means some loss of
that cohesion, perhaps from combat, perhaps from moving
through difficult terrain, perhaps from intermixing with
friendly units. The net result, however, is always the same: a
disordered unit is less effective in combat, and more likely to
break. Thus, Grande Armee represents disorder in exactly
that way: a unit which suffers a loss of cohesion suffers the
loss of additional SPs. When your units roll on the terrain
table and receive the higher terrain cost, it represents the
slower pace of a unit that has become disordered.
I realize that I'm asking you to think outside the box of
what a wargame "ought" to include. With Grande Armee,
you must always keep in mind your role as player: you are
an army commander. Army commanders did not worry with
dressing the lines of individual battalions. In any large batde,
they probably couldn't see most of the units in their armies,
and thus had no idea whether they were disordered or not.
Either your brigadiers and colonels took care of this, or they
didn't, and their units suffered accordingly.
 Things Fall A part
3.0 Suppres sion
Artillery units may be S uppressed by skirmish
attacks. A suppressed artillery unit may not fire in the
upcoming artillery fire phase. (It may still take a "Final
Shot.") It is not otherwise penalized. Suppression is
removed at the end of each pulse.
4.0 Broken Units and "Routing"
The terms Broken and Ro uted are used fairly inter-
changeably in this book. Technically, routing is what
the men of a unit do after that unit breaks. It describes
an uncontrolled scattering and flight as a unit comes
apart. Within relatively short order, the officers on the
scene will have to put this unit back together again
("rally" it), or these men will never again constitute an
effective body on today's battlefield.
4.1 Marking Broken Units
When a unit breaks, the owning player should place a
casualty marker on its base and immediately move it to
the rear of the Force. It doesn't matter exactly where
the routed unit is, because it is nowhere. It can be
moved around as needed; we keep it only on the table
to remind our elves that it needs to be rallied later.
The routed unit has no effect on play at all. Any unit,
friend or foe, may move through any routed/broken
unit as if it weren't there. (Because it isn t.)
The player should write the letter "R" on its roster,
to show it has routed, and currently has zero SPs.
4.2 Routing Through Friendlies
Because our bases represent so much open space, it is
possible for units to rout "through" friendly units with-
out necessarily causing them disorder or panic. Thus,
even if units are tightly packed together, and there is
seemingly nowhere for the routing men to "go," there
is in fact a lot of open ground across which they can
run. A routing unit does not penalize friendly units.
No doubt this will seem "wrong:" that a unit falling back dis-
orders friendlies, but a unit routing does not. But this is
because a unit falling back represents whole, intact forma-
tions still trying to maintain order and discipline, and the
very long formations of their companies and squadrons.
When two such formations collide, they do indeed disorder
each other.
If a unit has its back to impassable terrain, or is com-
pletely surrounded by enemy units such that no path at
least 3" wide exists in any direction free of enemy
units, then when that unit breaks, it is eliminated
instead: it may not be rallied.
Players must get it out of their heads that routing units are
actually somewhere, moving on the table like normal units.
They aren't. We place them at the back of the Force purely
as a game convenience, but in reality the unit has come
apart, and is strung out along the whole line of its rout. A
routed unit doesn't really exist at the moment. We keep it
on the table only as a reminder and a point of reference for
the rally attempt. The question is: can the ofHcers put this
unit back together before it disintegrates completely? If so,
then the unit will "rally," and thus retum within the radius
of the Force. If not, then it is hors de combat - removed
from play altogether. Perhaps after dark, or in the morning,
the men will be able to reform in some fashion, or the rem-
nants might be re-assembled.
5.0 Officer Casualties
An officer (of any rank) must roll to determine his fate
whenever he exposes himself to certain dangers. The
owning player must make this roll for each of his offi-
cers, each time they meet any of the criteria, below.
(This could entail several rolls in a single pulse, if the
officer is really in the thick of it.)
When within 1" of a unit that is the target of a
successful skirmish attack.
When he uses his Malor bonus to influence a
combat.
When any enemy unit moves through him.
When within 1" of a unit that breaks.
Whenever an officer meets any of these criteria, the
owning player must roll two dice. An officer has "fall-
en" on a roll of 11 or higher. A sub-commander with a
Malor bonus has fallen on a roll of 10 or higher. If so,
roll again on one die on the Fallen Officers Table.

J5.0: Fallen Officers Table
1-2 "Aiee! Putain de Merde!" Lightly
wounded, may re-appear in this battle.
3-4 * "I say, Smedly ... I rather think I
shan't be seeing this one through to
the finish ... n Badly wounded. He'll live,
but he's out of action for this battle.
5-6 "Herr General ... ? Herr General ... ?"
Killed in action. (If it's a French Marshal,
Napoleon shows up, says something heroic, and
makes sure everybody sees him weeping over
the corpse.)
If the officer casualty check was occasiolled by all ellemy
IlIIit 1II0llillg "through" his stolid, thell a roll of 3-4
table also mealls that the officer has beell caplllred.
When an officer is killed or wounded, he might not be
immediately replaced. Still, somebody on his staff
takes over the reins, whether or not a battlefield pro-
motion occurs. Since our game u es no particular time
scale, we abstract the period of confusion when an offi-
cer falls.
5.1 Replacing a Fallen Officer
When a sub-commander or deployed general falls, the
owning player has certain options:
If he has ADCs available, he may deploy one to
replace the fallen officer.
If he does not have any ADCs, but does have gen-
erals available, he must deploy a general to replace the
fallen officer. Generals and ADCs may only be
deployed in a player's Control Segment.
If the turn ends before the opportunity for anoth-
er Control Segment, OR if the player has no ADCs or
generals remaining, OR if he lacks the CPs to deploy
them, then a staff officer will take over. With a pencil,
increase the fallen officer's control number by 1 (to a
maximum of 5), and cross out any personality rating.
This could happen any number of times, if that staff
officer, in turn, was killed, etc.
5.2 Returning to Duty
If a lightly-wounded sub-commander returns to his
duties in the Command Phase, the staff officer is
immediately "erased," and the original sub-com man-
der's values are used. (His wound does not affect his
ratings because the Control number is based on his
personality, and the radius is based on his staff.) If he
o Things Fall Apart
had been replaced by a deployed General or ADC, then
that General or ADC returns to the commander's pool
of available officers.
During the Command Phase, roll one die for each
lightly wounded officer. On a roll of 5-6, he returns.
An officer who is captured may not return to the
battle on this day. (He might be exchanged during a
campaign, or even during a long battle, as Meerveldt
was at Leipzig.)
5.3 Fallen Army Commander
The players of that side should choo e a sub-com-
mander who will take over. They should choose a sub-
commander who also has a rating in the appendix for
army command. The newly-promoted sub-command-
er is immediately replaced, using the method in J5.1.
Move the army commander's base to where the sub-
all thi commander is, pencil in the new army commander's
Skill rating, and pencil in the new ratings for the
replacement sub-commander.
If the army commander wa lightly wounded, roll
each turn during the Command Phase to see if he
returns. Again, a roll of 5 or higher indicates that he
has recovered. When he recovers, his ba e stand
resumes its old Skill rating, and the sub-commander
who replaced him returns to his duties, also recovering
his old ratings.
An ADC or general may not be deployed to replace
the army commander.
5.4 Fallen Wing Commanders
A fallen wing commander is not replaced on this day of
battle. If only lightly wounded, he might return to
action, but otherwise the armis command system
simply carries on, without the benefits of having a wing
commander.
Rallying has usually been taken too literally by wargames,
which tend to give us a picture of a mob of men running
away, chased down by a general officer who waves his hat
and shout:s something patriotic.
Consider the physical space occupied by a unit that has
broken. It is no longer a unit, but a stream of men, stretch-
ing from the point of rout (where some stalwart:s are proba-
bly still hanging on, and about to become prisoners), all the
way back several hundred yards to the rear, perhaps even half
a mile, when dealing with mounted troops. Across this
expanse of ground are perhaps 2,000 men or more.
What Grande Annee tries to represent with rallying is
that the surviving officers of the brigade have made an
attempt to halt this stream, and thus to collect the men as
they filter back from the front.
K. The Rally Segment
My men saw mefall and atfirstfell back in disor-
der, leaving me in the hands of the Spanish. As it
turned out, although I had been plundered, our If the unit meets all these criteria, then calculate its
troops received reinforcements, returned to the rally factor, and consult the SP Recovery Table to
offensive, andfinally took the positionjrom the determine how many of its lost SPs it recovers.
enemy.
4.0 Rallying Broken Units
- Memoirs of Heinrich von Brandt. As the final step of the rally segment, a rally attempt
must be made for every broken unit. This is an
1.0 General Concept either/or proposition. Either the officers can bring the
unit back together then and there, or the unit will com-
At the end of the turn, after all pulse for that turn have
pletely disintegrate, and is removed from play.
been played, both players attempt simultaneously to
A broken unit should have been placed at the
"repair" their units. Players must perform these
"back" of its Force when it routed. Where, exactly, is
actions in the following order: 1) Attempt to recover
not important, but there must be a space for it to rally
lost SPs, and 2) Attempt to rally broken units. Only one
within its sub-commander's radius that will not be
kind of action may be taken for each unit in the rally
within 6" of any non-routed enemy units. If, in the
segment. To perform either, the player must calculate
a unit's Rally Fa ctor. rally segment, there is no place for it except within 6"
of enemy units, then it may not rally; it is eliminated.
Calculate the unit's rally factor. If the total is seven
2.0 The Rally Factor or more, the unit has rallied. Place it anywhere in its
The owning player designates a unit and establishes its sub-commander's radius facing any direction, but not
rally factor by rolling one die and adding it to a num- within 6" of enemy units. Now, consult the SP
ber based on its morale class, plus any appropriate Recovery Table, using that rally factor to determine
modifiers: how many SPs the unit rallied with (what its strength
will be, upon rallying.)
If the rally factor totaled six or less, the rally
K2.0 The Rally Factor attempt has failed. Remove the unit from play; it is
eliminated. Mark its loss against the army's morale.
.. one die plu : Artillery units are never broken - they don't rout.
When they take two hits, they are eliminated instead.
6 Gu ard
Elite Even if the gunners could rally, the guns themselves might be
5
spiked by the enemy and thus useless, or the train company
4 Vete ran (limbers, horses, and caissons) might be captured; in other
3 Train e d words, the supporting structure that keeps the battery in
2 Con cript action is broken and can't be repaired on this batdefield.
1 Raw
4.1 Marking a Rallied Unit
-2 for each circled " R" marked on the unit's ro - When a unit breaks, mark an "R" on its roster line.
ter, showing a previou rally. When it rallies, draw a circle around that "R." In the
+? for CPs spent by the army commander for thi future, this unit will have a penalty if broken again and
unit's rally factor trying again to rally. If it manages to rally a second
time, mark a second "R" on the roster, and so on. There
is theoretically no limit to the number of R's that can
3.0 Recovering Lost SPs accumulate on a unit, but with each one it will be pro-
A non-routed infantry or cavalry unit may attempt to gressively harder to rally the unit, until finally it
recover SPs that have been 10 t. To be eligible for this, becomes impossible, and the unit will disintegrate.
however, a unit must meet the following criteria: When a unit rallies, also mark its new, rallied SPs
immediately following the circled "R."
It must be within its sub-commander's radius.
It may not be within 6" of any non-routed
enemy unit. 5.0 The SP Recovery Table
It may not be artillery. This table is used by a unit which is attempting to
It has 10 t more than one SP. recover lost SPs, as well by a unit that has just rallied,
in order to see how many SPs it will have upon rallying.
 Rally Segment

He now looks at the SP Recovery Table to see how

many SPs the unit will have upon rallying. He needs
to recover 7SPs, so he's in the "6+" column. His Rally
Factor of B means that he will recover three SPs. Thus
his unit rallies with 3SPs. He writes a "3" on the unit's
None 0 -6 0 -4 0 -3 0 -2 0 -1 roster and he circles the "R n he had written when it
One 4-6 2-4 broke, to show that it has broken and rallied once
7+ 5-7 3-5
already in the game.
Two 8+ 7-8 6-7 5-6
Three 9+ 8 -9 7-8 6.0 Army Commander's Influence
Four 10 + 9-10 If the commander wishes, he may spend CPs to influ-
ence any raUy factor roll for any units up to half his
Fi ve 11+
radius away. He may do this any number of times in a
rally segment. Each CP spent adds 1 to a unit's rally
Across the top find the column for how many SPs the factor. He must commit all CPs before rolling for any
unit needs to recover. Moving down that column, find unit's raJIy factor. No unit may receive more than three
the unit's Rally Factor. Slide to the left to find how CPs toward its rally factor in a single raUy segment.
many SPs are recovered. Note that a unit with only one (Remember that player may place rallying units any-
SP to recover may not use this table (you can never where within their sub-commander's radius, not cIo -
recover all your lost SPs.) And a unit with six or more er than 6" from the enemy. If that location chosen for
SPs to recover can never recover more than five in one the rallying unit is al 0 within half the army comman-
pulse. der's radius, be may contribute CPs to the rally
attempt.)
A n example of Rallying: If playing a game with two or more allied armi ,
A Prussian infantry unit (Trained) originally had a commander may only sp nd CPs to rally the units of
7SPs. It has broken, and the owning player is trying his army.
to rally it. First he establishes the Rally Factor. The A wing commander may do this, too, if he is played
unit is Trained, which gives a 3, and he rolls a 5 on the by a person, and has a CP "allowance" at his disposal.
die,for a total Rally Factor of B. Thus his unit rallies. He may influence rally factor rolls for any units in his
wing, within half his radius, as above.
 L. Victory
Nightfall put an end to the fighting. Both sides were
so weary that in several places the firing ceased
without orders having been given. Never was a bat-
tlefield so thickly strewn with dead. I cannot
describe myfeelings as I passed over the ground
which had been dyed by my brother's blood.
- Culaincourt (who 10 t his brother at Borodino),
With Napoleon in Russia
1 .0 H ow a Battle Ends
A battle can end in one of three ways:
1. Army B might break (suffer a collapse of army
morale), resulting in a Deci ive Victory for
Army A. There might then be a Pur uit of defeat-
ed Army B.
2. The game might end by both players rolling less
than or equal to the turn number, once the game's
basic length has been reached. If this happens
without either army having broken, night falls and
this day of battle is (thus far) a Draw. There might
be another day of battle, or Army A might retreat
during the night, re ulting in a Marginal
Victory for Army B.
3. Both armies might break at the end of the same
turn. In this case, the battle ha ended in a Draw.
1 . 1 The Victory Flowchart
The flowchart on the following page explains the pro-
cedures to follow at the conclusion of a day of battle.
These procedures are explained in this chapter.
2.0 Army Break P oint
Each army has a Break Point. If playing a scenario,
then this has been provided for you. If designing your
own cenario, you must calculate it, as follows:
First, establish the army's level of confidence. This
can be one of three levels. Each has a percentage value:
Confident (35%)
The army has complete faith in its leadership, and
perhaps even contemptfor the enemy.
Fair (30%)
The army's level of confidence is "normal. "
Shaky (25%)
There is a morale problem. Perhaps the men doubt
their leadership, or perhaps they dread this enemy.
Most of the time, an army would be rated "fair."
Sometimes armies had units of varying quality, such as
Wellington's army at Waterloo, and one would average
their overall confidence.
Next, count all the units of the army: infantry, cav-
alry, and artillery. (In an Ottoman army, count the
engineers, too.) Multiply this number by the percent-
age, rounding up fractions over 0.5. For instance, if
Wellington's army is confident, and has a total of 26
units, then 26 X .35 = 9.1. His army's break point for
this game will be 9.
What Is Army Morale?
An anny goes into battle with a certain "mood." Much of
this has to do with things far beyond the scope of this par-
ticular battle. Does this anny have a tradition of victory
against this particular enemy? Have the men been fed,
clothed, and paid properly? Do they have enough ammuni-
tion and other supplies? Has the weather been awful? Does
the enemy commander have a certain reputation? (The
French came to dread Wellington, as the other allies dread-
ed Napoleon.)
Once the annies have concentrated into the confines of
a battlefield, the deployment of the anny and the sight of the
enemy can also affect the mood. In the days of linear war-
fare, when men were packed closely together and all com-
munication had to be either verbal or brought by courier,
this mood was carried by the officers. If the men saw their
officers panicky, shouting, or looking confused, the soldiers'
confidence quickly collapsed. Because of the tight fonnations
and proximity of soldiers to each other, changes in morale
(good or bad) spread very quickly.
Finally, battles were usually long. (Americans, who live
on more southerly latitudes, may not realize that the North-
European day in summer begins around 4:00 AM, and the
sun doesn't set until about II :OOPM.) A Napoleonic battle
consisted of hours of waiting and standing still, perhaps
under enemy fire, and then sudden, desperate periods of
intense activity. No wonder men might "snap" or break and
run, or perhaps go wild in the frenzy of a charge: they are
finally relieving all the hours of stress and strain leading up to
that moment.
Why are ArtIllery Counted the Same as Infantry?
Although losing an artillery battery might mean the loss of
only 100-200 men, while losing a brigade could easily be fif-
teen times that many men, generals were very concerned
about the loss of guns. In every battle report from the era,
the victorious commander lists the number of nags (or
"eagles") taken, and the number of cannon. Losing the big
reserve batteries or the valuable horse batteries was definite-
ly bad for morale!
 Victory

Ll.l The Victory Flowchart

I
--------------- -------, How Did the Battle End?
I
lOne Army Breaks I Nightfall: Neither
Army Breaks Both Armies Break
(A defeats B) This Battle is a Draw
Both players secretly choose, then
I The Battle is Over

~
reveal to either " tay" or "Leave"

I Does Army B (defeated) have

~ Lt. Cavalry SPs?
I I I
Both
Stay
ideAl
Leaves
I I
Both
Leave
~
~
I
EJ EJ End ofDay
Procedure

~
Retreat is
Covered
Marginal Victory
for Side A 1. Stragglers & Lightly
Deci ive Victory wounded return
for Side A (L7 1 )
Army B i Pur ued
Resolve Pursuit Losses 2. Weak units may be
There will be another converged (L7.2)
day of battle
3. If the battle is not over, there
will be another day ofbattle:
The Battle
is Over * Make new rosters
* Add overnight reinforcements
* Recalculate Army break points
Resolve "End of Day"
fur Army A --------------4.~
The Battle is Over

L _____________________ _ I
 VictOry .
3.0 Army Morale Check
Keep track of all units in an army which have been
routed and not rallied (eliminated), or units that are
overrun - i.e., all units that are eliminated and
removed from play. At the end of a turn in which the
number of these units equals or exceeds the army's
break point, you mu t roll to check Army Morale.
Indeed, from that point forward, at the end of every
turn in this day of battle, you must check.
If an army fails its morale check, it has broken,
and the game proceeds to its final stages, as illustrated
by the Victory flowchart.
To check army morale, the commander should roll
two dice. Prior to rolling, he may subtract a number for
CPs he had earlier committed (see LJ.1) to army
morale. To the roll, however, he must add the number
of the current turn just completed, and he must add
one for each eliminated unit beyond the army's break
point. (For example, if the break point was 9, and he
has 10 t 11 units, then he must add two.)
Thus the army morale check roll is:
2 Dice
+ Tur n Number
+ U nits 10 t beyond Br eak Point
- CP committed
If the result of this roll total 14 or Ie s, the army
h a p as e d its morale check. Proceed to the next
turn, if there is one. If the result was 15 or more, the
a rmy' morale ha colla p ed . Proceed to the
Pursuit steps, explained later in this chapter.
A n example of army morale:
Wellington's aI-my has a Break Point of 9. At the end
of Tum Six, he has lost a total often units. Therefore
he must check morale. He has not committed any CPs
to army morale.
He rolls a 6, adds it to the tum number (6), and
adds an additional one, because he has lost one more
unit than his break point. 6+6+1 = 13. Therefore, his
army has passed this tum. He'l[ have to check again
at the end of each subsequent tum, though.
Once your army's break-point has been reached,
you can only hope that the enemy is in even worse
shape, or that the day of battle will end (night will fall)
before your army morale collap es.
3.1 CPs and Army Morale
If you are worried that your army is nearing its break
point, you may set aside CPs during the command
phase, to be used for an army morale check at the end
of that turn. (DS.o) Once et aside, tho e CPs may not
be used for anything else in the turn . They represent
the time and attention the commander and hi staff are
paying to the growing problem of keeping the army
together in the face of attrition and entropy, not to
mention exhaustion.
The greater the loss of army morale, the greater
the proportion of CPs which must be committed. To
influence the morale check by a certain number, you
must commit the square of that number in CPs.
Therefore, a -1 modifier costs 1CP, but a -2 modifier
costs 4CPs. To influence the army morale check by -3,
you would have to set aside 9CPs, and for -4, 16CPs,
and so on. There is only so much that the army com-
mander can do, once the collapse begins.
3.2 Les Gardes Reculent!
When any infantry or cavalry of "guard" morale
breaks, immediately count it as a unit lost against army
morale. If, in the rally segment, it fails to rally, count it
again. Thus, completely losing a guard unit costs dou-
ble for army morale. (Merely seeing the guards break
could have a negative impact on army morale, even if
they rally later, not just because of rumors of defeat
preading through the ranks, but also because of the
effect on the morale of the army command and staff,
who no doubt are becoming depressed and certain of
defeat at this point.)
3.3 Reinforcements and Army
Morale
As reinforcements enter the field, they increase the
army's break point. Apply the multiplier for confidence
level to the total number of reinforcements that have
arrived this turn, and increase the break point accord-
ingly. (If a corps of 14 units has arrived, and the army's
confidence is "fair," then 3096 of 14 is 4.2 - add 4 to
the army's break point.) Note that this can get an army
out of trouble, if it has just passed its break point, but
is "saved" by the arrival of fresh troops. Everybody
loves to be reinforced: go get 'em, lads!
4.0 If Both Armies Break.
It is possible that both armies might break at the end
of the same turn. In this case, the battle has ended in a
draw. (Both sides have fought each other to the point
where neither army is battle-effective any more.) Both
armies go to the "End of Day Procedure."

5.0 If Nightfall Comes and Neither
Army bas Broken
If the two sides are unbroken, each player should take
a piece of paper and secretly write "stay" or "leave" on
it, then reveal them simultaneously. If both have writ-
ten "stay," then there will be a second day of battle. If
there are multiple allied armies on one side, the two
(or more) commanders may talk and decide if they will
stay or go. The allies need not agree; one of their
armies can quit the field , while the other remains for a
second day of battle.
If both players have written "leave," then the bat-
tle has ended in a draw. Both armies go to the "End of
Day Procedure."
If side A has written "leave," then his army with-
draws during the night. The battle is over; side B win
a Marginal Victory. Both armie go to the "End of Day
Procedure. "
6.0 If One Army Breaks
If Army B breaks, then Army A has won. (If more than
one army is present on a side, both must break in order
to say that this side has broken.) Army A (the victori-
ous side) now checks to see if it can Purs u e the
defeated Army B.
6.1 Will there be a Pursuit?
Total the number of light cavalry SPs remaining to
both armies, at the moment Army B's morale col-
lapsed. If Army B (the loser) has equal or more light
cavalry SPs than Army A, then its withdrawal is
Co e r ed . There is no pursuit, at least not in game
terms. Army A has won a M arginal victory. Both
armies go to the "End of Day Procedure."
If, however, Army A (the winner) has more light
cavalry SPs remaining than Army B, then B will be
Pur ued. Army B will u e the "Pursued Procedure,
while Army A goes to the "End of Day Procedure."
Army A has won a Deci ive victory.
s8 s7 s6 S5 S4
9-10 8-9 7-8 6-7 5-6
11-12 10-11 9 -10 8-9 7-8
13+ 12+ 11+ 10+ 9+
e Victory
6.2 Pursued Procedure
The winner must establish the ratio of superiority he
holds in light cavalry SPs. This is called the Pur ui t
Ratio, and it can be: 1:1, 3:2, 2:1, or 3:1+. Next, note
the weather at the time the game ended. Finally, calcu-
late the Time Factor (how much daylight is left for
the victors to pursue.) Calculate this by taking the
game's basic length, and subtracting the number of the
turn on which the game actually ended. The time fac-
tor could thus be zero, or a negative number. (A po i-
tive time factor means that there is still a lot of daylight
left, and thus more chance to pursue.)
6.21 Resolving the Pursuit
On the Pursuit Table, the winning player roUs to deter-
mine the fate of every unit in the losing army which
survived the battle. In each case he points to a unit on
the losing side, then rolls two dice, adding the time fac-
tor to his roll:
Example of Pursuit: The Prussian army broke while
checking army morale at the end of Turn 8 in a game
whose basic length was 7. (That means it was getting
dark.) The time factor is thus -1 . The weather is
"Normal. " The French haue a substantial aduantage
in light caualry SPs, so there is going to be a pursuit.
Both sides tally up their light caualry SPs, and the
French find that they haue 34 remaining, while the
Prussians haue only 14 left That's a 2-1 aduantagefor
the French.
Using the 2:1 column aligned with 'All Other
Weather, " the French player will check against euery
suruiuing Prussian unit, rolling two dice and sub-
tracting one (the time factor of -1). Let's say he starts
with a unit of Prussian infantry. He rolls a 5, minus
one is 4. That means "No Harm ." This Prussian
infantry unit suffers no losses during the pursuit.
6.22 Pursuit Losses
Obviously, certain units might be eliminated by losing
1 or 2 SPs, if that was all they had left to lose at the time
their army broke. Artillery,
of course, would be elimi-
nated by losing 2SPS. A unit
eliminated on this table is
considered to have come
apart, and the stragglers and
No Harm survivors are run down by
lose 1SP enemy cavalry, or captured,
or otherwise unable to
10 e 2SPS rejoin the army in this cam-
Eliminated paign.
 VictOry .

6.23 Pursuit and Multiple Armies 7.3 Make New Rosters

A broken army may not be pursued, if it has another If playing a second day of battle, or an ongoing cam-
allied army still holding the field . Let us say that the paign, then the next step of the procedure is to make
(F)rench army i facing both the (A)ustrians and new ro ters for the armies, using the SPs and radii
(R)ussians. If A breaks at the end of Turn 5, but R is arrived at in L7.2, above - or L6.21, if the army was
still holding the field, then A will not be pursued at all; pursued.
even if R then breaks next turn. (Only R would be pur-
sued in this case, since it was the only army of that side 7.4 Final Steps
remaining when its morale broke.) La tly, any reinforcements aid to arrive overnight are
added to the army, and the army's new Break Point
7.0 The "End of the Day" Procedure may thus be calculated for the next day of battle.
Armies that are not being pursued at the end of the day
mu t complete certain steps. There are additional 7.5 If Pursued ...
steps that need to be completed, if the battle is not over Remember that an army being pursued does not go
and there is to be a econd day of fighting. through any of the "End of Day Procedure." It may
therefore not recover lightly wounded officers, con-
7.1 Stragglers and Lightly verge weak units, exchange prisoners, roll to recover
Wounded Return SPs, etc.
First, any lightly wounded officers return to duty. If
players have captured any of each other's officers, they
may negotiate now to exchange them. About the Victory Rules:
Next, determine if unitS can recover any addition- In most wargames there Is "no tomorrow," and thus no
al lost SPs during the night. This procedure is exactly penalty for completely wrecking one's army. Very few
like recovering SPs during the normal Rally Segment, wargamers would hesitate, as Napoleon did, to commit the
except that no modifiers are u ed besides a -1 for all Guard at Borodino. These rules address the crucially impor-
tant events that happened immediately following a battle. A
rolls if your army lost the battle (marginaly or deci-
general who throws away his light cavalry in reckless charges
sively).
will nnd himself without a cavalry screen if pursuing or pur-
Roll to recover lost SPs for each infantry and cav- sued. (This will tum a marginal defeat into a decisive one.)
alry unit in the army, as in Ks.o. Artillery, baggage A general who hurls his whole army into battle early, with-
trains, and engineers may never be recovered. out keeping a reserve, runs the risk of breaking it early, too.
That means that the enemy pursuit will have all afternoon to
7.2 Converging Weak Units run him down. It Is no coincidence that most batdes were
decided in the waning hours of the day. The commanders
Next, as part of the "End of the Day" procedure, play-
tried to set up a situation where they could make a nnal push
ers may converge pairs of weakened units if they
when the enemy was exhausted, but they also wanted to
belong to the same Force and if both are reduced to make sure that if this big gamble failed, darkness would pre-
half or less of their original SPs. They must be the same vent the enemy from punishing them too severely. Don't
type of units: infantry may only converge with ruin your army; there's always tomorrow, after all.
infantry, light cavalry only with light cavalry, and
heavy cavalry only with heavy cavalry. If they are two
different morale classes and skirmish values, the con-
verged unit will take the lower values in each case.
Artillery can never recover hits and may only be
converged if they are the exact same type, both in gun
size and with regard to Foot/Horse, and they both
belong to the same Force. Otherwise, surviving
artillery units must limp along with 1SP.
If there are no infantry or cavalry units left in a
Force, then that Force can be abolished, and any sur-
viving artillery can be given to another Force.
Otherwi e, Forces can not be converged with other
Forces. Sub-commanders should have their radii
adjusted accordingly.

1.0 Garrisons
In Grande Armee, a "garrison" is a small group of
infantry that has been assigned the defense of a town
or fortified area. Since these men were frequently
drawn from elite companies of various units, and
because they were assigned to hold the place at all
costs, we do not represent them as a normal infantry
brigade. Instead, at the beginning of a game, the sce-
nario rules will specify that a particular town block or
fortified area has a garrison.
The garrison has an SP strength, like any other
unit, based upon the number of men and its average
morale level. A garrison does not have to be represent-
ed by figures on the table, although you could certain-
ly create a small diorama of infantrymen to represent a
garrison, if you wanted. All that is necessary is a note
in the army's roster, showing the morale and SPs of the
garrison. The garrison is in cover, and thus has advan-
tages in combat, and when being fired upon.
A garrison may never leave its place during the day
of battle. If it loses a combat but is not broken, it does
not have to fall back. (In this case, during combat, the
attacker would have to fall back, instead, even if victo-
rious against the garrison.) The only way to dislodge a
garrison from its place is to break it.
A garrison which is broken may not rally. It is
eliminated instead. It counts as a unit lost, toward an
army's break point. Obviously, the army might recover
that point where the garrison once stood, but alas, the
brave garrison is no more.
Although it may not rally, a garrison may recover
lost SPs during a pulse in which it meets all the normal
criteria to do that. Unless otherwise specified in the
scenario, consider the garrison to have "Veteran"
morale.
A garrison is a unit, and thus forces enemy units to
obey the 6" Rule in its presence.
A garrison may not be the target of a skirmish
attack, nor may it skirmish attack any enemy units.
1.1 Creating New Garrisons
During the game, a player may create a garrison by
deliberately placing an infantry unit in a town block or
fortified area. The unit must spend one complete pulse
"fortifying" the place: it must start and end the pulse
there, doing nothing but that. If it moves or partici-
pates in a combat in that pulse, it is not fortifying. (It
could be the target of skirmish or artillery attack, with-
out losing its ability to fortify the place.) Once it has
finished fortifying at the end of the pulse it is no longer
a normal unit: it has become a garrison, and is now
subject to the rules above. Remove it from the table.
M. Special Cases
Cries of alarm among the troops shall be punished
by death .
- The Archduke Charles, 7 July, 1809
A player may not create a garrison if by doing so he
would transform the only remaining infantry unit of a
Force.
A garrison is different from an infantry unit which
is in hard cover. An infantry unit may always be in
hard cover and enjoy the benefits of that cover.
Becoming a garrison is a deliberate action which trans-
forms the unit, making it immune to retreat, but also
impossible to rally once broken.
2.0 Towns: A Summary
These rules have been stated in various other sections
of this book, but it would be useful here to review all
the special considerations involving towns (or "built-
up areas.")
2 .1 A town should be composed of one or more 4"
square bases. A unit is never partially in the
town base; it either has enough movement to
enter the base completely, or it may not enter it.
Only one unit may occupy the base. If a unit is
falling back, and its fall back move would place
it partially within a town, decide whether the
fall back places more than half of the unit with-
in the town base. If so, place the entire unit
within the town. If not, stop the fall back just
short of the town.
2.2 A unit moves through a town base as if moving
along a road. But an artillery or cavalry unit
may not end its movement in a pulse in the
town base. Only an infantry unit may end its
move in a town base. A unit may not wheel or
oblique move in, from, or through a town base.
A unit may, however, change face in a town
base, and it may retrograde and/or flank move
in, from, or through a town base.
2.3 A unit in a town base may not make a skirmish
attack. However, when defending against a
skirmish attack, it receives a +2 bonus to its die.
2 .4 A unit in a town base receives a saving throw
against artillery fire.
2 .5 A unit in a town has no "flank" or rear, so it is
never a Vulnerable target for artillery. A unit in
a town or other hard cover is never flanked, nor
may it be considered as flanking an enemy unit.
(It is holed up in the town, not maneuvering in
the field as a threat to the enemy.)
2.51 A unit in a town does, however, have
front/flanks/rear for purposes of its own move-
ment. For example, if it chooses to leave the
 Special cases .
town to attack an enemy, it still must obey
restrictions about movement, and the cIo est
enemy to its front, etc.
2.6 If a defending unit is in a town, and must fall
back, then it must fall back completely out of
the town base it had occupied. The victorious
attacker will occupy that town ba e. Remember
that cavalry units may not (and are never forced
to) attack a unit in a town base.
2.61 If, however, the defending unit is prevented
from falling back completely out of the town
base by impassable terrain, then the defending
unit does not fall back at all. It loses another
1SP instead. (It remains holed up in the town,
unless that one more SP loss caused it to
break.) The attacker's units fall back 3". (They
are regrouping for another attempt to storm the
town.)
3.0 Prussian Howitzer Batteries
Most armies employed howitzers, usually as one-third or
one-fourth of the tubes in each battery. They were more
expensive than cannon, and made in fewer numbers, and not
every battery would have its full complement of howitzers in
every case. Unlike cannon, howitzers fired in an obvious arc
and their shells exploded. They were thus very useful for
those instances when direct-fire was least effective, such as
hitting men behind defensive works or setting towns ablaze.
Armies sometimes removed howitzers from batteries into
makeshift "howitzer batteries," but Prussia had the only
army which specifically raised howitzer batteries as such (in
addition to the howitzers in "normal" batteries.) There were
at least two Prussian howitzer batteries in service with
Blucher's Army of Silesia in 1813-14, and the Prussian
1815 army had a howitzer battery attached to each corps.
Howitzer batteries move as foot artillery. (The
gunners were supposed to ride on the horses which
also pulled the limbers, but apparently there were not
enough horses, so some gunners walked.) They are
also normal foot artillery units in combat, eligible for a
final shot, taking escape rolls and able to attach to
infantry units. They have 2SPS.
Howitzer batteries were not intended to combine
their fire with normal artillery. (The regular batteries
had their own integral howitzers for that.) Therefore,
howitzer units may not combine fire with anything but
other howitzer units. However, a howitzer unit may
fire on any enemy unit in range, even if other friendly
artillery have already fired on that enemy unit.
Likewise, normal artillery can fire on an enemy unit,
even if a howitzer battery has already fired on it.
Howitzers have special abilities. They may fire
over any friendly or enemy units, hitting any enemy
unit in range which they can see.
A howitzer unit always has a range of 12". Like
other artillery units, they roll two dice, or one if they
have one hit on them. They get no bonus dice.
Howitzers hit on roll of 4-6, regardless of
range and target type. Furthermore, when saving
against howitzer hits, target units must use special
Save Numbers, which apply only against howitzers:
Saving Throws against Howitzer Fire
1 Soft cover
2 Hard cover or town
1 The target unit is artillery
1 The ground condition is Mud
4.0 British Rocket Batteries
The British army deployed at least two batteries of Congreve
rockets. Oddly enough, one battery served with Bemadotte's
Army of the North in Germany in I 8 I 3. While they were
wildly inaccurate and had nowhere near the killing power of
regular artillery, the rockets were useful in at least two ways.
One: they were an indirect fire weapon which could hit men
behind fortifications and set buildings on fire. And two: they
made a God-awful noise which frightened men and terrified
horses. Wittgenstein once called them, "the Devil's own
artillery."
A rocket battery is treated as a horse artillery unit
for purposes of movement. However, if it is contacted
by the enemy and fails to evade, then it is automatical-
ly overrun instead. It may not engage in combat, nor
attach to a friendly infantry unit. It has no SPs, and
does not count as a unit lost toward army morale. (Half
the army would probably be happy to see the rocke-
teers gone!)
Like a howitzer, rockets may fire over the heads of
friendly and even enemy units, to hit any enemy
infantry or cavalry unit within range that it can see.
The rockets have a range of 12".
When firing a rocket battery, resolve its fire as if it
were a skirmish attack with an SKt value against
infantry and an SK2 value against cavalry. If its attack
succeeds, it might cause 1SP loss. The rockets are inef-
fective against enemy artillery. Target units receive no
defense bonuses of any kind, and in fact do not use
their own SK values; the target of a rocket attack sim-
 o Special Cases
ply rolls one die, comparing it to the rocket unit, which
rolls one die +1 or +2, as the case may be.
Rocket batteries do not combine their fire with any
other artillery unit, and they may fire at any enemy
unit in range, even if other friendly artillery have
already fired on that enemy unit.
5.0 Reinforcements and Off-Map
Movement
In a perfect world, we would have a wargames table so
immense that there would be no need for anything like "off
board" movement, or that sense of the tableedge being the
end of the world. There is no good reason, of course, why a
unit two inches off the table should be out of the game. But
since this is a game, with all the limitations that implies, we
must state a clear rule to avoid player arguments that would
arise when units "magically" appear and disappear.
A unit which is forced off the board or driven into
impas able terrain is eliminated. This could happen as
a result of a rout or fall-back in combat, if the enemy
has pushed you right up against the edge of the board.
In many cenarios, one or both sides have rein-
forcements that are scheduled to arrive at a specific
point of the table, on some later turn. During the
Command Phase of a turn in which a player might
receive reinforcements, he must check to see if they
have arrived. If so, he can immediately raise his army's
break point, and re-calculate the number of Forces he
now has, for rolling on the Command Table.
The units may enter using the road movement
bonus, if there is a road there. They must enter and
remain within the radius of their sub-commander, and
in that pulse spent "entering," they must all enter, if at
all possible. In the next pulse after these units have
entered, the newly-arrived sub-commander(s) will
behave according to the command rules, as normal.
(Up to now, they've just been marching to the sound of
the guns. Now that they've arrived, they have to be
integrated into the battleplan.)
6.0 Sappers and Other Specialists
You will need to make special one-inch square bases
for massed engineer companies. Each army gets one of
these stands deployed with the army commander. For
a Napoleonic army, deploy an additional stand for
each two Forces in the army. Thus, a Traditional army
will only have one stand of engineers, while a
Napoleonic army of four Forces would have a total of
three. All these engineer stands will be placed I" direct-
Iy behind the army commander's base at the beginning
of the game.
Exception: The Ottoman empire had a huge and
cherished engineer corps, and placed special emphasis
on siegecraft and battlefield engineers. Unlike most
European armie , who often thought of engineers as a
necessary evil, the Turks considered engineering the
most honorable of all military profes ions. An
Ottoman army may deploy one engineer stand for
every two Forces in the army, plus one for the army
commander.
Engineer units have ISP. They may not skirmish,
nor be skirmish attacked. They move entirely on their
own, anywhere on the board, with the expenditure of
lCP per unit, no matter how far they are from the army
commander. They are "fast infantry" for purposes of
movement. When on their own (not attached to a
friendly unit), they may not move into combat with
enemy units, and if contacted, they automatically
evade, falling back before the enemy, as many times as
neces ary. They may, however, be shot at by artillery,
in which case their save number is the same as
artiilery.
In all armies except the Turks, engineers are not
counted for purpo es of army morale, and their loss
has no effect on army morale. In the Ottoman army,
they are counted, and their loss counts toward the
army's break-point.
Every nation had a corps of engineers. (Known as "sappers,"
"pioneers," etc.) These brave souls were tasked with the
demolition or construction of various things, often under
enemy fire, and they were frequently used to assault heavi-
ly-defended works. In some armies they were also responsi-
ble for the army's siege train and/or bridging equipment. In
Grande Aimee, we will simply call them all "Engineers."
Most army-corps had at least a company of engineers
attached to the headquarters. We're interested, however, in
the situations where the army commander would deploy his
reserve force of engineers, or pemaps mass them for a spe-
cific task.
6.1 Attached Engineers
By spending ICP to move an engineer unit, a player
can attach that engineer to a friendly infantry unit of
any Force. Place it in base-to-base contact, although it
doesn't have to add any frontage - it can be placed
behind the infantry. On the turn they are attached, nei-
ther unit may exceed its movement allowance; the
engineer couldn't move its maximum, attach, and then
move again with the infantry, for instance.
 Special cases .
An infantry unit with attached engineers gets one
bonus die in combat. When it attacks a defending unit
which is holding light or heavy cover, it negates the
defender's bonus for that cover. (The defender would-
n't get any saving throw for hard cover, for instance, if
he's being attacked by an infantry unit with attached
engineers.) Engineers are thus especially useful for
blasting their way into towns or forts. Exception:
Engineers do not negate a defender's save number for
being in woods.
If the attached infantry unit is broken, the engi-
neers are removed from the board. (They do not rally
with the unit, if it rallies.) Otherwise, the engineer
remain with the attached unit, no matter how much of
a beating it takes. (Unrealistic, perhaps, since they'd be
in the front ranks, but then again most of these guys
were wearing helmets and metal body-armor.)
While attached, an engineer unit requires no CPs
to move. It simply moves with its parent infantry unit.
It may be detached, at the beginning of any pulse, prior
to that infantry unit's move, by spending 1CP. If, how-
ever, the infantry unit is falling back, the engineers
may not detach - they are along for the ride, and suf-
fer the fate of the infantry unit.
6.2 Bridging
To recreate bridging operations, you will need to
model a pontoon bridging train on a stand the same
size as those used for artillery. The bridging train rep-
rents a team of pontonnieT"s (specialized bridging
engineers) and enough pontoons to make a bridge 3"
long. Each army may deploy one such unit, although in
certain cases there might be more. A French army with
the Imperial Guard present would have at least anoth-
er bridging train present, since the Guard had a very
sizable corps of pontonniers.
Each bridging train moves at the speed of foot
artillery, and requires 1CP to move, no matter how far
it is from the army commander. A bridging train unit
has 1SP. If fired on by enemy artillery, its target class is
the same as artillery. It may not be the target of a skir-
mish attack. (It was probably the target of skirmishers
all the time, but that didn't stop our intrepid ponton-
niers.) It may never move to contact with the enemy,
can not evade if contacted, and will fight as a 1SP
infantry unit.
To build a bridge, a bridging unit must begin its
move at water's edge, receive 1CP to "move," and then
spend that entire pulse working on the bridge. Place a
die or numerical marker showing "1" at the end of the
first pulse it has spent working on the bridge. At the
end of the pulse, roll one die. If the roll is 1, then it has
laid a 3" bridge section across the river. If not, it must
spend the next pulse in the same fashion, requiring
another CP, unable to do anything but work on the
bridge. At the end of the second pulse, change the
marker to "2" and try to roll two or less on the die, and
so on, until you roll equal to or less than the number of
the marker at the end of a pulse.
When the bridge is built, remove the bridging
train for the rest of this day of battle.
Your men can lay more than 3" of bridge, but they
have to work in 3" sections. First, they lay a 3" section.
Then, if there is another bridging train available, they
must be adjacent to that section, to begin working on
the next section, starting in the same manner, trying to
roll a 1 or less after one pulse, and so on, until they've
built another 3" section.
If the bridging train unit is destroyed by enemy
fire or combat, its work is lost; remove the marker.
Friendly engineer units can assist the bridging
unit. For each engineer unit in contact with the bridge
train unit, and also receiving its own 1CP, subtract one
from the die roll to determine if the bridge is complet-
ed.
If is raining, or if the weather is below freezing,
you must add one to your die rolls for bridging
attempts.
Pontoon bridges were nowhere near as strong as a
normal bridge, and were at the mercy of rough cur-
rents or enemy artillery fire. Rules for river current are
best left to individual scenario "special rules." A sec-
tion of pontoon bridge may be destroyed by enemy
artillery fire. The bridge gets a :5:4 saving throw. One
bit will destroy it.

1.0 Human "Personality" Ratings
Players representing sub-commanders are still part of
the command system. They must be given a command,
or they will have to take a control test. But if you would
prefer a more free-wheeling system for sub-command-
ers played by actual player , then apply this rule:
If a player sub-commander fails a control test, and
no enemy units are visible, then his Force is inactive
for that pulse. However, if a player fails his control test
when he has a visible enemy, then he uses his own
judgment to interpret the army commander's wi hes
as he sees fit. When a player represents a sub-com-
mander, ignore that historical commander's personal-
ity rating. (You've replaced it with your friend's "per-
sonality rating.") Clearly, sub-commanders could be
quite independent fellows, and they did, in fact, some-
times change the battle plan without their chiefs
approval. Sometimes that change of plan even saved
the day.
If you want to get technical, players should not be
allowed to talk to each other about the game unless
their officer ba es are touching. They may send notes
to each other, which will get delivered on the next
pulse after ending. Ideally, this is the way you hould
play it, if you strive for "historicity." As a veteran
wargame referee, though, I would be frankly aston-
ished if players could abide by this rule.
2 .0 Vive I'Empereur!
Many commanders had an emotional impact on their sol
diers, to the point that the men could be moved to greater
exertions if they knew that the boss was watching. Officers
wanted to be remembered for the heroic exploits of their
units, and men of all ranks hoped for decorations or promo
tions, which were much more likely if the army commander
was paying special attention to this sector of the field.
Before the game, players must agree on whether the
commander's charisma was such to justify the inclu-
sion of this rule. (Obvious examples are Napoleon,
Blucher, Tsar Alexander, Ney, Suvarov, etc. Players
will have to decide for others.)
A unit which is "under the chiefs eye" must be half
or Ie s the current visibility distance to the comman-
der's base-stand. Such a unit gets a bonus die in com-
bat, a saving throw of 1 (added to any other applicable
save numbers), and a +1 to its Rally Factor if trying to
rally or recover lost SPs. (In addition to any CPs the
commander might contribute to a rally attempt.)
N. Optional Rules
Thefortunes of war arejickle, my dear general. We
shall retrieve tomorrow or the day after what you
have lost today .... Nothing is lost so long as courage
remains.
- Buonaparte to Massena, 29 July 1796
3.0 "Hidden" Sub-Co mmanders
If a sub-commander is within the army commander's
radius, but the army commander can't actually see
him, due to some terrain obstruction like a forest,
town, or hill between them, then a command to that
sub-commander requires an extra CPo
It is unlikely that the army commander could pick out a spe-
cific officer (no matter how Hamboyantly dressed) beyond a
few hundred feet. This is purely a game convention to sym-
bolize the problems that might stem from a commander's
inability to see part or all of that sub-commander's Force. If
the army commander can't see the units to which he is giv-
ing orders, then his situation becomes more complicated. He
requires more information and time, perhaps the sending of
aides to report on exactly what this Force is doing.
4.0 Blown Cavalry
Cavalry could not charge over and over again because the
horses (not to mention the men) would become "blown," or
worn out. Even the healthiest horse had only one really good
charge in it, and then with rest might be able to come back
again with somewhat reduced vigor, perhaps repeating this
pattern four or five times in a day. M ost battle horses had
already spent weeks on the campaign trail, though, and had
lost a lot of weight and strength. They might not even have
one good charge in them.
I have decided to relegate this rule to the optional rules.
There are many problems with writing a rule that covers the
issue of blown cavalry. First, obviously, not all horses in the
army are in the same condition. Some have more "gallop"
in them than others. Second, not all charges are carried out
in the same way. Sometimes cavalry went pell-mell in an all-
out charge - this was frequently the case with the Turks and
the British. More often, the troopers fought at the trot, or
even at the walk, because of the better control it gave them
over the animals and over their formations. Well-disciplined
heavy cavalry would reserve a real charge for only the final
J 00 yards or so, specifically to conserve the strength of their
mounts, and be able to fight their way out if counter-charged
by enemy cavalry. A nd finally, since our turns don't repre-
sent any fIXed period of time, but rather periods of activity
or inaction, each varying in length, it seems difficult to estab-
lish how many turns or pulses would have to pass for horses
to regain their strength.
 Optional Rules .
After a normal combat in which cavalry attacked an
enemy unit, roll one die. On an odd roll, the cavalry has
become blown. Some sort of marker will be needed. (A
foaming horse, perhap ? A broken-down nag?)
Blown cavalry counts as a "Vulnerable" unit in
combat, though not if being shot at by artillery. Blown
cavalry may not be counted in the post-battle period a
cavalry that could be used in pursuit of a beaten foe,
nor as cavalry covering the retreating (beaten) army.
Cavalry that is blown may not prevent skirmish attacks
within 2", although as usual for cavalry they may not
be skirmish attacked, them elves.
If, at the end of a pulse, a blown cavalry unit has
not moved, nor engaged in any combats with enemy
units, it may remove the Blown status marker.
5.0 Baggage Trains and Loot
This game makes no provision for supply. Running out of
ammunition was a rather rare occurrence for a large army
during a Napoleonic battle. Even after three full days of
intense fighting at Leipzig, for instance, the French artillery
still had about a day's supply of ammunition remaining. So
we do not place supply wagons on the table, nor worry with
re-supply rules. Capturing the enemy's ammunition was usu-
ally of little use anyway, since most armies used different cal-
ibres of musket and different systems of artillery.
Capturing the enemy's food and alcohol, however, was
another matter entirely. We must remember that above all,
soldiers were hungry. It is likely that they got nothing at all
to eat during a day of battle, and probably had had very lit-
tle during the march to the battlefield the day before. If,
when breaking through enemy lines, soldiers found a wagon
full of food, it was almost certain that they would stop to
plunder it, if not sit down right there and eat a meal. Alcohol
was such a treat that it was even more irresistible than food.
Russian and British troops in particular would usually stop
dead in their tracks, even in the midst of pursuing a beaten
enemy, to guule down every drop they could find. Combine
that with empty stomachs and a day of stress, and the men
usually ran wild or collapsed. And we mustn't assume that it
was just the private soldiers who looted. Several French
Marshals like Soult and Massena were infamous looters.
Soldiers were as likely to plunder a fat-looking town as
they were to loot the enemy's baggage, but the enemy bag-
gage train held a special significance for both sides. It often
contained the army's pay, as well as supplies and other
assorted loot. Its capture implied to the losing soldiers that
their officers had been careless, or that the enemy had
humiliated them. Its effect on morale was similar to taking
standards or cannon.
For every three Forces in an army, the army will travel
with one baggage wagon. Mount this figure on an
artillery-sized base. A baggage wagon must be placed
within 12" of the army commander at the beginning of
the game. During the game, the wagons move as foot
artillery units. They are not part of any Force, but each
wagon requires lCP to move, each time it is moved,
regardless of its distance from the commander. The
wagons may never move off the table, nor may they be
more than 36" from the commander at any time.
The wagons are supremely vulnerable. If contact-
ed by an enemy infantry or cavalry unit, they are cap-
tured. (Artillery can't move into contact with any
enemy unit, even a lowly baggage wagon.) When a unit
captures an enemy baggage wagon, it will almost cer-
tainly stop to loot it.
At the moment of capture, the capturing unit must
stop immediately. It may occupy the ground covered
by the baggage wagon, as b st po ible, but may move
no further that pulse. In the next pulse, the a player
must roll one die. An infantry unit will continue to loot
on a roll of 3+, a cavalry unit on a roll of 4+. A unit with
"Guard" morale will only loot on a roll of 6. If a unit
continues to loot, it may not do anything else that
pulse at all, no matter how close the enemy is. It may
not move, nor recover lost SPs. Its SK value is reduced
to zero. If fired upon or attacked by the enemy, it may
not evade, and is a Vulnerable unit in combat. If the
unit has finished looting, it is a normal unit again, and
capable of any of its normal game actions.
On the next pulse, roll again, but this time subtract
one to the roll. (Guards may thus never loot more than
one pulse before their officers recover their composure
and get them in formation again.) Continue this every
pulse for a unit that is looting until it ceases, each pulse
subtracting another one from the die roll (subtract two
on the second pulse, etc.) If a turn ends, simply treat
the next pulse played as the next pulse, when calculat-
ing how long a unit has been looting.
A baggage wagon does not count toward an army's
total number of units, when figuring the army's break
point. However, the capture of a baggage counts as
two units against that break point. The capture of bag-
gage wagons is a mixed blessing: it can seriously hurt
the enemy's morale, yet it can also incapacitate your
units.
6.0 Random Starting Weather
If you are playing a campaign, or designing your own
scenario and wish to randomize the weather condi-
tions, then prior to set-up roll two dice for the starting
weather:

N6.o Random Starting Weather
Weather Nov-April May-Oct
Precipitation 2-S 2-4
Overcast 6-8 S-6
Normal 9-10 7-9
Sunny 11-12 10-12
+1 iffighting in Spain or Italy
If playing a game set in the period November-April,
roll again. 1-4 is Rain, and S-6 is now.
If the roll is even, then the weather will not be variable
on this day. If the roll was odd, then there will b
weather variation. If the weather starts as Rain, then
the ground condition will be Soft. Otherwise the
ground is Hard, though it may change during the day if
rain or snow persi ts.
7.0 P laying Without Ros t e r s
The original playtest version of thi game did not use
rosters, but rather a ystem of numerical markers to
show hits. These were placed on a unit's ba e, and were
thus visible to both sides. At the suggestion of a strong
majority of playtesters, Grande Armee ultimately
dropped this method and used ro ters, instead. But
not everybody is happy with pen-and-paper book-
keeping.
If you would prefer not to use the rosters, you will
need some sort of markers or numerical chits. These
should be placed at the rear of a unit's base. An
artillery unit, obviously, could take only one before it is
destroyed. Once the hits equal the unit's SPs, it breaks.
To play this way, the unit labels will have to be
modified to show unit morale and SPs, as well as their
other information:
I II/ 1/ 2 Bourcier Trained SSP, SK2 MX I manders always use their personality ratings, whether
When a unit breaks, write an "R" directly on its unit
label. If it rallies and returns to the game, and then
later breaks again, the presence of that "R" will serve to
remind you of the appropriate modifiers for its rally
attempt. A unit can theoretically acquire any number
of R's on its label, just as on its ro ter.
In this system, each unit's label becomes its own
roster.
Optional Rules
8.0 Stubborn Defenders
Under this optional rule, a Spanish, Ottoman, or
Ru sian infantry unit receives a bonus die in combat if
it is protected from all attackers by soft or hard cover.
9.0 The End of the World
One of the frustrating things about wargaming is the
limit of the table-edge, and our inability to "scroll" the
battlefield. Instead of being automatically eliminated if
routed or pushed back at the edge of the table (as in
rule MS.o), apply the following rule.
This unit applies to a unit that i backed against
the table edge, and: a) is a cavalry or artillery unit that
evades, b) falls back as a result of combat, or c) is bro-
ken. If the involuntary movement would carry it off the
table edge, roll a die. On an odd roll, the unit is elimi-
nated. On an even roll, "turn" and withdraw as best
you can, staying on the table edge. Gamers will need to
apply some common sense here: you mustn't manipu-
late the situation so as to retreat towards the enemy,
you must try to retreat toward the other friendlies of
your Force, etc.
If a unit is pushed off the table edge by an enemy
unit contacting and/or combating it, then that enemy
might follow it off the table edge. Roll a die: on an odd
roll, the victorious enemy unit pursues its victim right
off the table edge, and i also eliminated from play. On
an even roll, the victorious enemy unit stops at the
table edge.
A unit which is pushed off the table edge becau e
it is broken, counts as a unit lost for Army Morale. But
a unit that moves off the table edge otherwise (evading,
pursuing, falling back), does not count as lost for Army
Morale.
10.0 Wing Commander Personality
The last paragraph of G8.2 explains that sub-com-
part of a wing, or not. In other words, a wing comman-
der's personality rating is ignored. This optional rule
provides an exception to this:
On a scenario-by-scenario basis, if you do not have
a person playing a wing commander, you may choose
to use that wing commander's personality rating. This
represents a case where the wing commander is either
obviously aggressive (such as Ney at Waterloo) or
obviously reluctant to bring his entire wing into action.
In such a case, when failing a Control Test for any sub-
commander within his wing and within his radius, add
the wing commander's personality modifier to that
sub-commander's sub equent Force Status roll, and
ignore the sub-commander's own personality rating.
S. Grande Arntee Scenarios
Grande Armee comes with four scenarios, fully
prepared with rosters and labels that you may
photocopy and u e. The scenarios were chosen
with an eye toward variety in both nationality
and size. There is one small scenario from the
Peninsular War (Fuentes), two "medium" ones
from the continental struggle (Friedland and
Aspern-Essling), and one large one (Waterloo).
In the future I will publish additional Grande
Armee scenario books, as well as a campaign sys-
tem. Additional scenarios will be offered on the
website, and several are already available.

Visit the Grande Armee website at:

www.ammutafa.com/grandearmee.hbnl

Map key for the scenarios:

/VVV'>. Fortifications
- Road
~ Town
......"..... River
~ ~~ Marsh
Forest

@HillS .

Note on the Rosters:

If a roster entry does not designate a specific type
of unit (such as "Grenzers or "Dragoons, etc),
then assume the unit is line infantry.
 I never slept when opposed by Massena . I never
knew a moment's rest... The Battle Of
-The Duke of Wellington Fuentes de Oiioro
Defeated by Wellington at Bussaco and stymied in the long,
5 May 1811
hungry siege of lisbon, Massena's" Anny of Portugal" limped
back Into Spain. The men were exhausted, many horses died
along the retreat, and Massena had lost the confidence of his
subordinates. After reading reports of the French defeat,
Napoleon decided to retire his old friend, and drafted orders for
his dismissal.
Andre Massena had once been one of the finest generals in
Europe, but by 181 I he was aging, tired, and past his prime.
(General Maxlmilien Foy wrote that "he is only fifty-two but he
looks well over sixty.") Massena traveled now with his mistress
and a staff of plunderers to fill his personal coffers, and he no
longer took the kind of care in reconaissance that he once did.
Still, he was as good a French commander as Wellington would
face in the Peninsula, and in his last battle at Fuentes, he gave
the "Iron Duke" his hardest fight. Left: Arthur Wellesley, the Duke of Wellington.
Wellington had decided that the French withdrawal from Right: Marshal Andre Massena, Duke of Rivoli.
Portugal was the perfect opportunity to open some modest
operations in Spain. To do this he began cooperating with Spanish partisans, and planned to take two border fortresses at Almeida and
Ciudad-Rodrigo. When he realized that he lacked the power to lay siege to both, he settled for Almeida. In April I 8 I I the Anglo-
Portuguese anny began to move rapidly toward the frontier, expecting Massena's French to be far away, still licking their wounds.
But Massena, unaware that his dismissal (and his replacement, Marshal Mannont) were both en route from France, had no intention
of letting Almeida fall without a fight, and he was eager to save his reputation and his personal honor. He spent only two weeks re-sup-
plying and resting his anny, and absorbing some ten thousand fresh replacements from France. Then at the end of April the Anny of
Portugal set out to meet Wellington once again. The anny was desperately short of horses, and as a result had left behind half of its artillery
and cavalry. At the last minute Massena was reinforced by the nearby forces of Marshal Bessieres, from northern Spain. This proved to
be a mixed blessing; Bessieres seemed bent on preventing his cavalry from seeing action, and flagrantly disregarded Massena's instructions.
Wellington saw it all coming, of course, well-infonned as he was by Spanish guerillas and his own scouts. He chose a strong defen-
sive position that allowed him to keep an eye on Almeida and still left him room to move if Massena got tricky. But the French were not
trying to out-maneuver him; they were coming for a fight. Slightly outnumbered, Wellington nonetheless had more and better artillery.
Fuentes is actually two battles. The first occurred on 3 May. Massena tried to stonn the town of Fuentes with elements of three
infantry divisions, but his men were driven back. There was a period of relative Quiet on the 4th, as the French pondered their next move.
Then on the Sth a renewed French attack In the South made headway and bent back Wellington's line into a right angle. Trying to clinch
the victory, Massena's Infantry became bogged down in the center, as the whole battle devolved into a back-and-forth struggle for the
town of Fuentes itself. Ultimately frustrated, the French withdrew. This scenario represents the second day, with both annies fully drawn
up.

The Scenario:
The weather is Sunny, with no variation. The ground is Hard. The game's Basic Length is 6.
The town of Fuentes (1 base) is Hard Cover. The two streams are both fordable, and constitute ob tacles.
The morale of the allied anny is Confident. Its Break Point is 9.
The morale of the French anny is Fair. Its Break Point is 8.
 Fuentes de Oiioro "

Roster for the A nglo-Portuguese A rmy

Commander: The Duke of Wellington (Great)
Weather: Sunny, No Variation (24") _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Army's Break Point: 9 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
This is a Traditional Army of 6 Forces

Garris on of Fuentes Veteran 7SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

1st Division: Spe n cer 2/7"
1/1 Stopford (Guards) Guards 9SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ _
1/2 Nightingale Elite 6SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
1/ 3 Howard Elite 7SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
1/ 4 Von LOwe (KGL) Veteran sSP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ _
3 r d Division: Picton (V) 1 / 7"
3/ 1 MacKinnon Veteran sSP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
3/ 2 Colville Veteran sSP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ _ _
3/ 3 Powers (Portuguese) Trained 4SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
5th Division: Erskine 4 / 5" Cautious
5/1 Hay Veteran sSP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
5/2 Dunlop Veteran sSP_ _ _ _ _ _ __ _ _ __ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
5/3 Spry (Portuguese) Trained 4SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
6th Division: Campbell 3 / 5"
6/ 1 Hulse Veteran sSP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
6/ 2 Burne Veteran 4SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
6/ 3 Madden (Portuguese) Trained sSP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
7th Division: Houston 3/ 4'
7/ 1 Sontag (Light) Veteran 6SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
7/2 Doyle (Portugue e) Trained sSP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Light Divis ion: Craufurd (V) 1 / 7"
L/1 Beckwith (Light) Elite sSP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
L/2 Drummond (Light) Veteran 6SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
L/ 3 Ashworth (Portuguese) Trained 4SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Artille ry: Wellington must attach these to his Forces prior to set-up, but the choices of which Forces to attach them
to is completely up to him. British sub-commanders' radii have been slightly increased, in order to add the artillery. No
more than two artillery units may be added to anyone Force.
9-pdr Foot (A) _
9-pdr Foot (B) _
6-pdr Horse (C) _
6-pdr Horse (D) _
Port. 6-pdr Foot (E) _
Port. 6-pdr Horse (F) _

Cavalry: Likewi e, choo e one of the Forces to add Cotton's cavalry unit:
Mixed Light Cavalry Trained 6SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
 " Fuentes de Ofioro

Roster for the Army ofPortugal

Commander: Marshal Massena (Good)
Weather: Sunny, No Variation (24") _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Army's Break Point: 8 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Generals Available: 2
This is a Napoleonic army of 5 Forces.

II Corps: Reynier 3 / 9 "

1st Division: Merle
II/l/l Sarrut (Legere) Veteran 8SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
II/l/2 Graindorge (Legere) Veteran SSP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
2nd Division: Heudelet
II/2/l Godard Veteran 6SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
II/2/2 Arnaud (Legere) Veteran 8SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Corps Cav P. Soult (Light)Trained 4SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
II: 6-pdr Horse __
VI Corps: Loison (V) 2 / 12"
1st Division: Marchand
VI/l/l Maucune Veteran 7SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
VI/l/2 Chemineau Veteran 6SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
2nd Division: Mermet
VI/2/l Menard (Legere) Trained 8SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
VI/2/2 Taupin Trained 6SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
3rd Division: Ferey
VI/3/l Simon (mixed types) Trained SSP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
VI/3/2 Line Trained SSP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
VI: 8-pdr Foot __
VIII Corps: Junot 3 / 6"
1st Division: Solignac
VIII/l/l Gratien Trained SSP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
VIII/l/2 Thomiere (Fr., Irish, Pr.) Conscript 4SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
VIII: 4-pdr Horse __
IX Corps: d'Erlon 3 / 6"
1st Division: Claparede
IX/l/l Claparede (Legere) Trained 6SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
IX/l/2 Vichery Trained SSP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
2nd Division: Conroux
IX/2/l Gerard Trained 6SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
IX: Fournier (Chasseurs) Trained 4SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
IX: 8-pdr Foot __
Cavalry Reserve: Bessieres (V) 5 / 8"
C/l Montbrun (Dragoons) Trained 4SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
C/2 Wathier (Chasseurs) Veteran SSP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
C/3 Lepic (Gren. a Cheval) Guards 6SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Cav: 4-pdr Horse __
 Fuentes de Oiioro "

I"

The Battlefield of
Fuentes de Oiioro

Alternative Fuentes, Play-Balancing, and What-Ifs:

1 . French Reinforceme nt
Junot's 8th Corps had taken a pounding in the Portugue e campaign, and Massena took only one division of it with
him to Fuentes, leaving the rest to guard communications. He could have caned on these men for the battle, if needed.
(This would have scrambled orne of the names of his brigadiers, who had just been re-a igned before Fuentes, so I
won't include brigade names for these units.)
A. Increase Junot's radius to 9", and add the following two infantry units:

Clau el' Divi ion:

VIII/ 2/l Line inf. Trained SSP, SK2
VIII/ 2/2 Line inf. Trained SSP, SK2

Increase the French army's break-point to 9.

2. Be ieres Play Ball

Massena had asked for cavalry from Marshal Bes iere's strong "Army of the North." He did get some cavalry, but alas
the Marshal came along, too, and proceeded to make Massena miserable. This variant assumes that Bessieres simply
sent the cavalry, as requested.
A. Instead of Bessieres, have the cavalry reserve commanded by Montbrun, rated 3/6".

3. Spanish Reinforcements
Wellington had the assistance on this campaign of Julian Sanchez's irregular cavalry, who screened his right flank quite
well. He had chosen, however, not to wait for Spanish reinforcements for this campaign, given his unpleasant experi-
ences with Spanish armies at Talavera. This variant assumes that Wellington had the service of the remnants of La
Romana's army, which had served with him at the lines of Torres Vedras.
A. Add one Force (the first three units are all Spanish line infantry) to Wellington's army, as follows :

La Romana 3 / 6"
S/ l La Carrera Conscript 6SP
S/ 2 O'Donnell Trained SSP
S/ 3 Zamora Trained SSP
SI C Sanchez Oight cavalry) Raw 4SP
 " Fuentes de Ofioro

Labels for Fuentes de Ofloro (cut and paste to unit bases)

Massena (Good)
Wellington (Great) II: Reynier 3 / 9"
Cotton's Light Cavalry 11/1/1 Sarrut (Legere) SK2
1: Spencer 2 / 7" II/1/2 Graindorge (Legere) SK2
1/1 Stopford SK2 11/2/1 Godard SK2
1/2 Nightingale SK2 11/2/2 Arnaud (Legere) SK2
1/3 Howard SK2 II: P. Soult (Light)
1/4 Von LOwe (KGL) SK2 II: 6-pdr Horse
3: Picton (V) 1/7" VI: Loison (V) 2 / 12 '
3/1 MacKinnon SK2 VI/1/1 Maucune SK2
3/2 Colville SK2 VI/1/2 Chemineau SK2
3/3 Powers (Portuguese) SKI VI/2/1 Menard (Legere) SK2
5: Erskine 4 / 5" Cautious VI/2/2 Taupin SK2
5/1 Hay SK2 VI/3/1 Simon (mixed types) SKI
5/2 Dunlop SK2 VI/3/2 Line SKI
5/3 Spry (Portuguese) SK2 VI: 8-pdr foot
6: Campbell 3 / 5" VIII: Junot 3 / 6"
6/1 Hulse SK2 VIII/1/l Gratien SK2
6/2 Burne SKI VIII/1/2 Thomiere (Fr., Irish, Prussian) SKI
6/3 Madden (Portuguese) SKI VIII: 4-pdr Horse
7: Houston 3 / 4" IX: d'Erlon 3 / 6"
7/1 Sontag (Light) SK2 IX/1/1 Claparede (Legere) SK2
7/2 Doyle (Portuguese) SK2 IX/1/2 Vichery SKI
Lt: Craufurd (V) 1 / 7" IX/2/1 Gerard SK2
L/1 Beckwith (Light) SK2 IX: Fournier (Chasseurs)
L/2 Drummond (Light) SK2 IX: 8-pdr Foot
L/3 Ashworth (Portuguese) SK2 Cav: Bessieres (V) 5 / 8"
9-pdr Foot (A) C: Montbrun (Dragoons)
9-pdr Foot (B) C: Wathier (Chasseurs)
6-pdr Horse (C) C: Lepic (Grenadiers a Cheval)
6-pdr Horse (D) C: 4-pdr Horse
Port. 6-pdr Foot (E)
Port. 6-pdr Horse (F)
 The loss of Marshal Lannes wasfelt by the The Battle Of
whole army, and completed the disasters of that
fatal day. Aspern-Essling
-Savary, Memoires (Vol. 2, Ch. 9)
The Second Day: 22 May, 1809
In retrospect it is easy to criticize Austria for tackling France
alone in 1809, but the Austrians were counting on a number of
pre-conditions. Their plans assumed a continued French entan-
glement in Spain, a British landing in northern Germany, a
Prussian uprising, Quiet on the Turkish frontier, and a neutral or
even sympathetic Russia. In the end, Vienna got less than half of
these things.
The army of I 809 was the biggest and in many ways the
best force that Austria fielded during the Napoleonic wars. The
artillery had been completely re-organized, a corps d'armee sys-
tem was implemented (although Charles later said that it had
never worked as he intended), and a number of deadwood sen
ior officers had been trimmed from the military hierarchy.
Napoleon's Army of Germany was a hastily-assembled
affair, thrown together in the face of a full-scale Austrian attack,
built around a few veteran units (like Davout's III Corps, the
heavy cavalry, and the Guard), then neshed out with conscripts and allied contingents from the German states. In the confusing early bat-
tles of the Spring, the Austrians were pushed back out of Bavaria, and Napoleon advanced Quickly down the Danube valley and occupied
Vienna. But the Austrian Hauptarmee had withdrawn north of the river, while the French had advanced from the south, and thus the
two armies were still very much intact, separated by the Danube. Napoleon, nushed with confidence that he faced a broken and demor-
alized foe, looked for a crossing point, and began building a pontoon bridge to move his army to the north bank.
The battle of Aspem-Essling occurred only because Charles let it occur. He could have opposed any French attempt to cross the
river, leaving the two armies in a stalemate, divided by the Danube. But he wanted Napoleon to get a sizable army across - just barely
- and then to mount a concentric attack that would drive the French Into the river. Charles did fool Napoleon into thinking that the
Austrians were dispirited and weak. As the French crossed the river virtually unopposed, Napoleon chose to lead with his pursuit forma-
tions: heavy in cavalry. This was the wrong kind of force he would need for the desperate defensive struggle which ensued, but the sin-
gle pontoon bridge and his constricted position did not allow for reinforcement once he had placed his head in Charles' noose.
On 21 May, the forces of both sides arrived piecemeal, and the outnumbered French clung to their bridgehead, which was anchored
on the towns of Aspem and Essllng, just across the northern bank of the river. During the night both sides drew up their annies, but the
French were hampered by constant Austrian interference with their sole pontoon bridge. Thus, as day broke on 22 May, Napoleon was
outnumbered, with his back to a major river. As Shakespeare had once said: We are chained to the stake, and bear-like we must fight.
The second day of Aspern-Essling was a ferocious and desperate struggle, made even bloodier by the restricted space. Both towns
were the scenes of repeated infantry assaults, and both changed hands several times. The ground between them was the site of large-scale
cavalry actions, where the Austrians generally had the advantage of more infantry for support. By afternoon, Napoleon had lost both
Aspern and Essling, and his situation was grave. In order to extricate his army, Napoleon would have to gain time and space. So around
2:00 he launched a gigantic cavalry attack into the left-center of the Austrian position, while the Young Guard stormed and re-took
Essling.
By 4:00 PM Napoleon had sufficiently regained the initiative to begin his withdrawal without peril. Charles had pulled back several
of his formations for rest and reorganization, and to replenish their exhausted supplies of ammunition. The French engineers, assisted by
the Old Guard, had repaired the pontoon bridge in Napoleon's rear. Thus the French, covered by the cavalry and Guard, began to edge
back along the whole line. It was during this retreat that Marshal Jean Lmnes, one of the best field commanders in the French anny, was
struck by an Austrian cannonball which crushed both his legs. He died a few days later.
Aspern-Essling was a hecatomb. On a front line of only two miles, nearly 45,000 men lay dead or wounded. Both sides had lost
grievously, and both needed a period of rest and reinforcement_ While the 1809 campaign ground on in the secondary theatres of Italy,
Poland, the Tyrol, and Dalmatia, the main Danube theatre would be quiet until July, when the final showdown occurred at Wagram.
Napoleon Bonaparte had suffered his first defeat.
 " Aspern-Essling

The Scenario:
This game examines the f erocious fighting on the second day of the battle, with both armies deployed,jac-
ing each other at close quarters.

The weather is Nonnal, and variable. The ground is Hard. The game's Basic Length is 7 turns.
All towns - Aspern (2 bases), Essling and Gross Enzersdorf (1 base each) - are hard cover. The Danube
river is impassable terrain.

The French army is "Confident." Its Break Point is: 14.

The Austrian army is "Fair." Its Break Point is: 16.

The Battlefield of
Aspern-Essling
 Aspern-Essling "

Roster for the armee d 'allemagne

Commander: Napoleon (Great)
Weather: Normal, Variable (20") _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Army's Break Point: 14 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ _ _ _ _ _ __
Generals Available: 2. ADCs: 2
This is a Napoleonic army of 3 Forces, plus two detachments.

IV Corps: Massena 2 / 18"

1St Divi ion: Legrand
IV/l/l Ledru (Legere) Veteran 6SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
IV/l/ 2 Ravier Veteran 6SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
IV/1/3 von Harrant (Baden inf.) Elite 6SP _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
2nd Division: Carra St. Cyr
IV/2/1 Cosson (Legere) Veteran 7SP _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
IV/2/2 Dalesme Trained 8SP _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
3rd Divi ion: Molitor
IV/3/1 Leguay Trained 7SP _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
IV/3/2 Vivies Trained 7SP _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
4th Division: Boudet
IV/4/l Boudet Trained 8SP _ _ __ _ _ __ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Cavalry Division: Lasalle
IV/ C/l Lasalle (Hus . & Chass.) Veteran 7SP _ _ _ _ _ __ __ __ _ _ _ _ __
IV/C/2 Marulaz (Chasseurs) Elite 8SP _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Corp Artillery:
IV: l2-pdr Foot __
IV: 6-pdr Horse __

II COrpS: Lannes (V) 1/17"

1st Division: Tharreau
II/l/l Conroux (Legere) Trained 7SP _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ _
II/l/2 Albert Trained 7SP _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
II/l/3 J arry Trained SSP _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _-'--_ _ _ __
2nd Division: Claparede
II/ 2/l Coehom (Legere) Elite 9SP -::-:::-_ _ _ _ _ _ __ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
II/2/2 Lesuire & Ficatier Trained 7SP _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
3rd Division: St. Hilaire
II/3/l Lorencz (Legere) Veteran 6SP _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
II/ 3/2 Destabenrath Trained SSP _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Reserve Division: Demont
II/ R/l Trained SSP _ __ _ _ _ __ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ _
II/R/2 Trained 6SP _ __ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Corps Artillery:
II: l2-pdr Foot A __
II: l2-pdr Foot B __
 " Aspern-Essling

French roster for Aspern-Essling, continued

Cavalry Reserve: Bessieres (V) 3 / 9"

1st Hvy Division: Nan outy
C/I/I Defrance (Carabiniers) Elite 6SP _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
C/I/2 Doumerc (Cuirassiers) Elite 7SP -=:-=-_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
C/I/3 St. Germain (Cuirassiers) Elite 7SP _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
2nd Hvy Division: St. Sulpice
C/2/1 Lagrange (Cuirassiers) Elite 6SP _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
C/2/2 Guiton (Cuirassiers) Elite 7SP _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
3rd Hvy Division: d'Espagne
C/3/1 Raynaud (Cuirassiers) Elite 7SP _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
C/3/2 Fouler (Cuirassiers) Elite 7SP _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Corps Artillery:
C: 8-pdr Horse A __
C: 8-pdr Horse B __

Imperial Guard: (Detachments)

(The Guard has already been broken up into two detachments, which do not count as Forces when rolling for CPs.)

1st (Young Guard) Division: Curial 2/6"

G/I/I Roguet (Tirailleurs) Elite 8SP _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
G/I/2 Gros (Fusiliers) Elite 9SP _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

2nd (Old Guard) Division: Dor enne (V) 2/6"

OG/I Old Guard Infantry Guard 13SP ---,-_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
OG/2 Arrighi (Combined Gd. Cavalry) Guard IOSP _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

Guard Artillery: (Napoleon must assign these to either Guard detachment at the beginning of the game)
G: 12-pdr Gd Foot __
G: 6-pdr Gd. Horse __
 Aspern-Essling "

Roster for the Austrian Hauptarmee

Commander: Charles (Good)
Weather: Normal, Variable (20") _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Army's Break Point: 16 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Generals Available: 3
This is a Napoleonic army of S Forces.

VI Corps: Hiller 2 / 10"

Adv. Guard:
VI/ A Nordmann Veteran 8SP _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
1St Division: Kottulinski
VI/l/ l Hohenfeld Trained 6SP _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
2nd Division: Vincent
VI/ 2/ l Splenyi Trained 7SP _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
VI/ 2/2 Bianchi Trruned SSP _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Corps Artillery:
VI: l2-pdr Foot _
VI: 6-pdr Foot __

I Corps: Bellegarde (V) 3 / 10"

1St Division: Fresnel
1/ 1/ 1 Wintzingerode Veteran 7SP _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
1/ 1/ 2 Vecsey (Chevauxleger) Veteran 7SP _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
2nd Divi ion: Vogelsang
1/ 2/ 1 IR17 Reuss-Plauen Trained 7SP _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
1/ 2/ 2 IR36 Kollowrath Trruned 6SP _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
3rd Divi ion: Ulm
1/ 3/ 1 IR1l Rainer Trained 6SP _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
1/ 3/ 2 I147Vogelsang Trained 6SP _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
4th Division: Nostitz
1/4/1 IR3S Argenteau Trained 7SP _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
1/4/2 1142 Erbach Trained SSP _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Corps Artillery:
I: l2-pdr Foot __
I: 6-pdr Foot __

n Corps: Hohenzollern 3 / 8"

Adv. Guard: Provencheres
II/ A Provencheres Veteran 7SP _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
1 t Division: Brady
II/ l/l Buresch Trained 7SP _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
II/l/2 Koller Trained 7SP _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
2nd Division: Weber
II/ 2/ l IR2l Rohan Trained 6SP _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
II/ 2/ 2 IR18 Stuart Trruned 6SP _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
II/ 2/ 3 IR28 Frelich Trained 7SP _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Corps Artillery:
II: l2-pdr Foot _
II: 6-pdr Foot _
 " Aspern-Essling

Austrian roster for Aspern-Essling, continued

IV COrpS: Rosenberg 4 / 13" Cautious

Technically, the IV Corps was split into two "columns" under Dedovich and Hohenlohe, but by the second day of the
battle they compri ed the Austrian left flank, and fought (mostly) unified under Rosenberg's command.
Adv. Guard: Rlenau
IV/A/1 (Uhlans & Hussars) Veteran 7SP :=-_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
IV/A/2 Hardegg (IR3 & Jagers) Veteran SSP _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
1St Division: Dedovich
IV/1/1 Gratze (Grenzers) Veteran SSP
IV/1/2 Ludwig & Koburg Trained 8SP - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
IV/1/3 Neustadter Trained 7SP _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
2nd Division: Rohan
IV/2/1 Carneville (Grenzers) Veteran 4SP :----==--_________________
IV/2/2 Stutterheim (Hu ars & Chv.lgr.) Elite SSP _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
3rd Division: Hohenlohe
IV/3/1 Reise Trained 7SP _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
IV/3/2 IR2 Hiller Trained 7SP _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
IV/3/3 IR33 Sztaray Trained 6SP _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _~--------
Corps Artillery:
IV: 12-pdr Foot __
IV: 6-pdr Foot __

Reserve Corps: Liechtenstein (V) 3/13"

1 tDivision: d'Aspre
R/1/1 Scovaud 1 (Converged Grenadiers) Elite 7SP _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
R/1/2 Scovaud 2 (Converged Grenadiers) Elite 7SP _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
2nd Division: Lindenau
R/2/1 Murray 1 (Converged Grenadiers) Elite 7SP _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
R/2/2 Murray 2 (Converged Grenadiers) Elite 7SP _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
3rd Division: Hessen-Homburg
R/3/1 Wartensleben (Hussars) Elite SSP _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
R/3/2 Siegenthal (Cuirassiers) Elite 6SP _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
R/3/3 Lederer (Cuirassiers) Elite 6SP _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
4th Division: Keinrnayer
R/4/1 Kroyer (Cuirassiers) Elite SSP _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
R/4/2 Rottermund (Dragoons) Veteran SSP -:--_-==_________________
R/4/3 Kerekes (Insurrection Hussars) Conscript 4SP _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Corps Artillery:
R: 6-pdr Horse A __
R: 6-pdr Horse B _
R: 6-pdr Horse C __
 Aspern-Essling "

Alternative Aspern-Esslings, Play-Balancing, and What-lfs:

Aspern-Essling is the most tightly balanced scenario in this book. But... if you must tinker, here are some
ideas:

1. French Reserves
Marshal Davout's III Corps was standing by on the south bank of the river, waiting to cross over to the
Aspern-Essling battlefield. Napoleon desperately needed these veteran regiments, but the French pontoon
bridge was so constantly in a state of repair that he never had a chance to deploy III Corps. Indeed, even if
Davout had been able to cross, it is likely there wouldn't have been room on the battlefield for him. Under
this variant, however, given a little luck, Napoleon can bring III Corps aero s the bridge.
A. At the end of each turn, the Napoleon player should roll a die. On a roll ofl-3 the bridge is once again
down, due to Austrian sabotage. In thi case, on the following turn, no French reinforcements can
arrive. However, on a roll of 4-6, the bridge has been secured enough to bring across Marshal Davout
and a single infantry division from III Corps (French player's choice) in the next turn.
B. When Davout arrives with his leading divi ion, raise French army morale, and the number of Forces
accordingly, and calculate his radius.
C. At the end of each turn, the French player makes this roll, until all of Davout's divisions are across.
Raise Davout's radius as new units arrive.

2. Austrian Re erves
Charles was in the midst of re-organizing his command structure, and the Austrian army was in a weird
limbo between "Corps" and "Columns." The corp of Feldmarschall Reuss-Plauen consisted of only a sin-
gle division of mixed units - everything from local Vienna militia to Jagers, Grenzers, and Uhlans. Reuss-
Plauen was unengaged during the battle, but could easily have joined the second day's fighting.
A. Under thi variant, include Reuss-Plauen's "corps" as a single division detachment, deployed within
12" of Ch arles.

3. Vive l'empereur!
At several points during the battle, the Archduke Charles exposed himself to extreme danger, riding into
the midst of broken Austrian units and rallying them. Napoleon maintained a glacial calm throughout most
of the battle, as wa his custom, but his presence was famous ly crucial to French morale.
A. Use the Vive l'empereur! optional rule for both commanders, as described in N2.0.

m Corps: Davout 1 / 1.5 Detachment: Reuss-Plauen 3/6"

1 t Divi ion: Morand
III/ l/ l Lacour (Legere)
I1I/ l/ 2I'Huillier
2nd Division: Friant
I1I/ 2/ 1 Gilly (Legere)
IlI/ 2/ 2 Barbanegre
IlI/ 2/ 3 Grandeau
3rd Divi ion: Gudin
I1I/ 3/ 1 Leclerc (Legere)
IIl/ 3/ 2 Boyer
IIl/ 3/ 3 Duppelin
Cavalry Division: Montbrun
IIl/ C/ l Pajol (Hu sars)
III/ C/ 2 Jacquinot (Cha seurs & Hussars) Elite 7SP
Corp Artillery:
1 12-pdr Foot B1Y
1 6-pdr Ilorse B1Y
RP/ l Reinwaldt Trained SSP, SKl MX
Veteran 9SP, SK2 RP/ 2 Militia and Landwehr Con cript SSP
Veteran SSP, SK2 RP/ 3 Radetzky (Grenz & Jagers) Veteran 7SP, SK2 MX
RP/ 4 Kerpen Trained SSP, SKl
Veteran 9 P, SK2
Veteran 7SP, SK2
Veteran SSP, SK2
Veteran 6SP, SK2
Veteran 9SP, SK2
Veteran SSP, SK2
Elite lOSP
 " Aspern-Essling

Labels for the Aspern-Essling Scenario (cut and paste to unit base)

Napoleon (Great) Y.G: Curial '2 / 6" ll : l2-pdr Foot

IV: Mas e n a 2 /18 " G/l/l Roguet (Tirailleurs) SK2 ll: 6-pdr Foot
N/l/l Ledru (Legere) SK2 G/l/2 Gros (Fusiliers) SK2 IV: Ro enbe r g 4 /13" Cautiou
N/l/2 Ravier SK2 O.G: Dor e nne (V) 2 / 6" IV/A/l (Uhlans & Hussars)
N/l/3 v.Harrant (Baden) SKI OG/l Old Guard Infantry SK2 IV/ A/2 Hardegg SK2
N/2/l Cosson (Legere) SK2 OG/2 Arrighi (Gd Cavalry) IV/l/l Gratze (Grenzers) SK2
N/2/2 Dalesme SK2 G: l2-pdr Foot IV/1/2 Ludwig & Koburg SKI
N/3/l Leguay SK2 G: 6-pdr Horse N /1/3 Neustiidter SKI MX
N /3/2 Vivies SK2 IV/2/l Carneville (Grenzers) SK2
IV/4/l Boudet SK2 IV/2/2 Stutterheim (Hus & Chev)
IV/C/l Lasalle (Hus & Chas) Charles (Good) N/3/l Reise SKI
IV/C/2 Marulaz (Chasseurs) VI: Hille r 2 / 10" IV/3/2 IR2 Hiller SKI
IV: l2-pdr Foot VI/A Nordmann SK2 MX IV/3/3 IR33 Sztaray SKI
IV: 6-pdr Horse VI/l/l Hohenfeld SK2 MX IV: l2-pdr Foot
ll: Lannes (V) 1/ 17" VI/2/l Splenyi SK2 MX IV: 6-pdr Foot
11/1/1 Conroux (Legere) SK2 VI/2/2 Bianchi SKI R: Liechte n tein (V) 3 /13 "
11/1/2 Albert SK2 VI: l2-pdr Foot R/l/l Scovaud 1 (Grenadiers)
I1/l/3 Jany SK2 VI : 6-pdr Foot R/l/2 Scovaud 2 (Grenadiers)
11/2/1 Coehorn (Legere) SK2 I : Bellegarde (V) 3 / 10 " R/2/l Murray 1 (Grenadiers)
II/2/2 Lesuire & Ficatier SK2 1/1/1 Wintzingerode SKI R/2/2 Murray 2 (Grenadiers)
II/3/l Lorencz (Legere) SK2 1/1/2 Vecsey (Chevauxleger) R/3/l Wartensleben (Hussars)
II/3/2 Destabenrath SK2 1/2/1 IRI7 Reuss-Plauen SKI R/3/2 Siegenthal (Cuiras iers)
I1/R/l SK2 1/2/2 IR36 Kollowrath SKI R/3/3 Lederer (Cuirassiers)
II/R/2 SK2 1/3/1 IRII Rainer SKI R/4/l Kroyer (Cuirassiers)
11: l2-pdr Foot (A) 1/3/2 IR47 Vogelsang SKI R/4/2 Rottermund (Dragoons)
ll: l2-pdr Foot (B) 1/4/1 IR35 Argenteau SKI R/4/3 Kerekes (Ins. Hussars)
C: Bessie res (V) 3 / 9" 1/4/2 IR42 Erbach SKI R: 6-pdr Horse (A)
C/l/l Defrance (Carabiniers) I: l2-pdr Foot R: 6-pdr Horse (B)
C/l/2 Doumerc (Cuirassiers) I : 6-pdr Foot R: 6-pdr Horse (C)
C/l/3 St. Germain (Cuirassiers) ll: Hohenzolle rn 3 / 8 "
C/2/l Lagrange (Cuirassiers) II/A Provencheres SK2 MX
C/2/2 Guiton (Cuirassiers) II/l/l Buresch SKI
C/3/l Raynaud (Cuirassiers) II/l/2 Koller SKI
C/3/2 Fouler (Cuirassiers) II/2/ l IR2l Rohan SKI
C: 8-pdr Horse (A) II/2/2 IRI8 Stuart SKI
C: 8-pdr Horse (B) II/2/ 3 IR28 Frelich SKI
 He who fears being conquered is sure of def eat. The Battle Of
-Napoleon
Friedland
During the long and frustrating winter of 1806/07, Napoleon's 14 June, 1807
Grande Armee lost over 30,000 men, more than half of whom
were casualties from the single bloodbath at Eylau. Only a few
French replacements arrived, and Napoleon made good his loss-
es with allied contingents. The Russian army had also suffered,
had also refitted during the early Spring, and now both sides
were eager for a final showdown.
The spring campaign opened badly for Napoleon. French
dispatches had been captured by the Russians, revealing deploy-
ments and movement orders. Count Levin Bennigsen, com-
manding the Russian army, used his Cossacks to confuse the
French cavalry scouts, and had stolen an entire week's march on
Napoleon. Bennigsen thus made the first moves while Napoleon
was still groping. The Russians crossed the Aile river into old
East Prussia. Murat's cavalry finally fixed them, and Napoleon
quickly moved in for what he thought would be the kill. But
Bennigsen got the jump on him, and mauled a portion of the
French army at Heilsberg on June 10th - Soult's and Lannes'
corps were both injured, as was Murat's cavalry reserve. Davout
saved the day by swinging behind the Russian army, forcing Bennigsen to abandon a strong position and fall back toward the river.
Four days later at the battle of Friedland, Levin Bennigsen, who had opened the campaign so well, lost his nerve. And Napoleon,
who had blundered for two weeks, suddenly found his game and delivered a brilliant performance.
The Russian army was badly deployed. True, it was in a compact formation with a good killing zone in front of it, but the Russians
had their backs to the Aile River, with only two bridges (and pontoons for two more). An area of marshy creek separated the Russian
right wing from the left, making coordination difflcult. Fixed by Lannes' corps early in the morning, the Russians dithered for hours as
French reinforcements trickled in. Napoleon arrived just after noon, with most of the Grande Armt!e already marching onto the field.
As the French corps arrived, Napoleon directed them into action. Around 5:00 PM Ney's corps, supported by Victor and a grand bat-
tery, delivered the decisive blow that crushed the Russian left_
Friedland was an infantry battle. The French out-marched and out-skirmished the Russians, and then blasted them at point-blank
range with canister fire from a 70-gun grand battery assembled by St!narmont, Victor's chief of artillery, acting under Napoleon's orders.
The French cavalry did not make much of a showing in this battle. Murat was not present (he was in the doghouse after his poor per-
formance at Heilsberg, and was detached by Napoleon to supervise the siege of KOnigsberg.) So the French heavy cavalry divisions were
divided up among the infantry corps, and not used to their full potential. Uvarov's Russian cavalry also made heroic charges as the Russian
army began to collapse, covering the retreat and preventing a French pursuit. Had Murat been present, and the French cavalry massed
as normal, it is likely that Bennigsen's heavy defeat would have been a total catastrophe. Still, Friedland must rank as one of Napoleon's
masterpieces. The Russians left some 20,000 casualties behind, though very few had surrendered.
Our scenario begins with Napoleon's arrival on the field. There are about nine hours of daylight remaining; plenty of time for the
Russians to get their act together, if they can, and change history.

The Scenario:
The weather is Normal, with no variation. The ground is Hard. The game's Basic Length is 6 turns.
The towns of Friedland (2 bases) and Sortlach (1 base) are Hard Cover. Posthenen (1 base) is Soft Cover. The Alle river
is unfordable. The MuhlenfluB stream is an obstacle. All hiJIs are Level One.
The Russians deploy first, then the French VI, VIII, and Reserve Corps. The French Guard and I Corps will arrive later
during the battle.
The Russian army is "Fair." Its Break Point is 15.
The French army is "Confident." Its Break Point starts at 11, but it will receive reinforcements during the game.
 o Friedland

Roster for the Russian A rmy

Commander: Count Bennigsen (Poor)
Weather: Normal, No Variation (20") _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Army's Break Point: 15 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
This is a Traditional Army of 11 Forces, organized under two wing commanders
In theory, the Russian reserves (including most of the Guard) were a separate Force under Constantine (who did not lead them
in this battle). Apparently, early in the day, many of these units were broken up and committed piecemeal to the two wings. By
the time our scenario begins, this has probably already happened. Howeuer, because sources differ on who went where, and
because it will help the Russians to have an elite reserve, I haue kept them as a sin'gle Force.

Left Wing: Bagratian (V) 2

Ad vanced Guard Division: Rayev ky (V) 2 / 8 "
AG/1 Jager Brigade Veteran SSP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
AG/2 Ogarev (Jagers) Veteran SSP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
AG/3 Fritsch (Jagers) Veteran 6SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
AG/4 Cavalry (Hussars) Elite 8SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
AG: 6-pdr Horse __

Support Divi ion: Markov 3 / 3"

S/l Trained 6SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
S/2 (with Grenadiers) Veteran 7SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

6th D ivision: Lovov 4 /4"

6/1 Rachmaninov Trained 6SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
6/2 Glouchkov Trained 6SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
6: 12-pdr Foot A __
6: 12-pdr Foot B __

2nd Division: Ost ermann 5/ 4 "

2/1 Mazovski (with Grenadiers) Veteran 7SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
2/2 Sukin (with Grenadiers) Veteran 7SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
2: 12-pdr Foot A __
2: 12-pdr Foot B __

Left Wing Cavalry Re e rve : Gallitzin (V) 2 / 9" Aggre ive

LC/1 Korff (Drag. & Uhlans)
LC/2 Cuirassiers
LC/3 Lambert (Hussars)
LC/4 Dorochov (Hus ars)
LC: 6-pdr Horse A __
LC: 6-pdr Horse B _
Veteran 6SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Elite 7SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Elite 6SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Elite 6SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

Right Wing: Gortchakov (V) 3

8th Division: Dochturov 4 / 5"
8/1 Engelhardt Trained 7SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
8/2 Sakomelski (Dragoons) Veteran 6SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
8 : 12-pdr Foot A __
8 : 12-pdr Foot B _
8 : 6-pdr Horse __
 Friedland "

Russian roster for Friedland, continued

7th Division: Essen 4 / 4"

7/1 Zaposki (Grenadiers) Elite 8SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
7/ 2 Trained 8SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
7: 12-pdr Foot A __
7: 12-pdr Foot B __

3rd Divi ion: Sacken 3 / 8"

3/ 1 Uschakov (w/ Grenadiers)
3/ 2 Titov
3/ 3 Netting
3: 12-pdr Foot A __
3: 12-pdr Foot B __
Veteran 8SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Trained 7SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Trained 7SP_ __ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

Right Wing Cavalry Reserve: Uvarov (V) 3 / 3" Aggressive

RC/1 Cossacks Raw 2SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
RC/2 Lourkovski (Hussars) Elite 6SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

Reserve Division: Constantine (V) 4 / 8" (a separate Force, not under either Wing)
R/1 Deperadovich (Guard inf.) Elite lOSP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
R/2 Bachoutzki (Guard inf.) Elite 8SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
R/ 3 Alexseyev Veteran 7SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
R/4 Gersdorf Veteran 6SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
R/ S Kollogirov (Gd Cavalry) Guards 8SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
R: 12-pdr Foot A __
R: 12-pdr Foot B __
R: 12-pdr Foot C __

Platov's Cossacks: Platov (V) 1 / 8" Aggressive (a separate Force, not under either Wing)
C/1 Cossacks Raw 4SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
C/2 Cossacks Raw 4SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___
C/3 Co sacks Raw 4SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
C/4 Cossacks Raw 4SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
C: 6-pdr Horse __
 " Friedland

Roster for the French Army

Commander: Napoleon (Great)
Weather: Normal, No Variation (20") _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Army's Break Point: 11 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
This is a Napoleonic Army of 3 Forces. During the game, two more will enter.
Napoleon has two ADCs and 2 Generals.

VI Corp : N ey (V) 3 / 11" Aggressive

1St Division: Marchand
VI/l/l Maucune Veteran 8SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
VI/l/2 Marcognet Veteran 8SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
2nd Divi ion: Bi on
VI/2/1 Roguet (Legere) Veteran 8SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
VI/2/2 Labasse Veteran 8SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
3rd Divi ion: Brun
VI/3/1 Bardet (Legere) Veteran SSP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Corp Cav: Colbert (Chass.) Veteran 4SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
1 t Dragoon Div: Latour-Maubourg
VI/D/l Perreymond Veteran SSP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
VI/D/2 Fresia (Fr. & Dutch cay) Veteran 6SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
VI: 4-pdr Horse __
VI: l2-pdr Foot A __
VI: l2-pdr Foot B __

Reserve Corps: Lannes (V) 1 / 15"

Grenadier Divi ion: Oudinot
R/l/l Ruffin Elite 8SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
R/l/2 Conroux Elite 7SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
R/l/3 Coehorn Elite 8SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
2nd Divi ion: Verdier
R/2/l Vedel (Legere) Veteran 7SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
R/2/2 Harispe Veteran 7SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
3rd Division (Saxons): Polentz
R/3/1 Sii6milch (Gren & elites) Veteran SSP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
R/3/2 Saxon line infantry Trained 6SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Hvy Cavalry Division: Nan outy
R/C/l (Carab & Cuir) Elite 8SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
R/C/2 (Cuirassiers) Elite 7SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
R: Saxon 6-pdr Horse __

VIII Corps: Mortier (V) 3 / 14" Aggre sive

1 t Division: Dupas
VIII/l/l Venux (Legere) Veteran 8SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
VIII/l/2 Gency Trained 7SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
2nd (Polish) Division: Dombrowski
VIII/2/l Kozinski (Polish inO Veteran 9SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
VIII/2/2 Sokolnicki (Polish It. cav.) Trained 4SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
2nd Cavalry Division: Grouchy
VIII/C/l Dragoons Veteran 4SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
VIII/C/2 Hussars Elite SSP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
VIII: l2-pdr Foot A __
VIII: 12-pdr Foot B __
VITI: Dutch 4-pdr Hor e __
 Friedland 0
Starting at the end of Turn One, roll one die. On a roll of 4+ the Guard corps will enter on the next turn. Continue
each turn until the Guard enters.

Guard Corps: Bes ieres (V) 3 / 14"

Infantry Division: Hulin
G/ 1/1 Dorsenne (Gren a Pied) Guards 8SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
G/ 1/2 Soules (Chass a Pied) Guards 8SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
G/ 1/3 Reveval (Fusiliers) Guards 6SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Cavalry Divi ion: Walthier
G/2/1 Lepic (Gren & Gend) Guards 8SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
G/2/2 Guyot (Chass & Drag) Guar~ 8SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
G: 6-pdr Gd. Horse A __
G: 6-pdr Gd. Horse B _
G: 6-pdr Gd. Horse C _
G: 6-pdr Gd. Horse D _

Starting at the end of Turn Two, roll one die. On a roll of 4+ the I Corps will enter on the next turn. Continue each
turn until the I Corps enters.

I Corps: Victor 3 / 14 Cautious

1St Infantry Divi ion: Dupont
1/1/1 Labruyere Veteran 9SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
1/1/2 Barrois Veteran 9SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
2nd Infantry Divi ion: Lapi se
1/2/1 Pacthod (Legere) Veteran 9SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
1/2/2 Darricau Veteran 8SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
3rd Infantry Divis ion: VilIatte
1/3/1 Frere (Legere) Veteran 8SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
1/3/2 Girard Veteran 8SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
I: Beaumont (Hus ars) Elite 8SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
4th Dragoon Divis ion: Lahou aye
I/D/1 Margaron (Dragoons) Veteran 4SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
I/D/2 Laplanche (Dragoons) Veteran 4SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ _
I/D/3 Thielemann (Saxon Hv. Cav) Elite 4SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
I: 4-pdr Horse A __
I: 4-pdr Horse B __
I: 4-pdr Horse C __

The Battlefield of
Friedland
 o Friedland

Alternative Friedlands, Play-Balancing, and What-lfs:

1. Bennigsen Has a Better Day
Levin Bennigsen has not fared well with historians. Even among his contemporaries in the Russian high command, he
was not well liked, and many have argued that he owed his frequent prestigious commands to his political skill, rather
than to military talent. Still, he had fought very skillfully at Pultusk in late 1806, he opened the 1807 campaign well,
and he should have done better at Friedland, particularly in the morning before the French army was fully assembled.
A. Upgrade Bennigsen's Skill rating to "Average."
B. Allow the Russians to set up second, and to re-deploy in any fashion, as long as their forces cover the same rough
area that they do in the normal set-up. (They can't deploy any more forward (i.e., closer to the French) than
they are allowed under the normal setup.)

2. Early Start
For much of the morning, Jean Lannes' corps bluffed the Russians into a stalemate while Napoleon rushed the rest of
the French army to the scene. Had the Russians attacked, Lannes could probably have made a fighting withdrawal, but
it would have changed the whole nature of the battle, making it much more fluid. In this variant, we also make things
interesting by scrambling the arrival of the French Forces.
A. Add two to the game's Basic Length.
B. Deploy the Russian army first, and then Lannes' corps. Use rule G9.0. Each of the other French forces has a pos-
sible "arrival number," as follows :
1-2 Mortier 3-4 Ney 5 The Guard 6 Victor
C. At the end of tum two, the French player rolls a die. Using the arrival numbers shown above, the die will deter-
mine which French Force begins entering on the first French pulse of turn three. Whichever Force it is,
Napoleon enters with it, and thus the French command system becomes normal, as per the game rules.
D. At the end of tum three, roll another die. If the die shows a Force that has already entered, then the French play-
er may roll once again. But if the die again shows an already-entered Force, then no French Force will enter on
the next tum. This procedure is repeated at the end of each turn, until all the French Forces have entered.

3. Murat Is Present
Murat had been detached by Napoleon to assist in the nearby siege of Konigsberg. The French cavalry reserve was nom-
inally led by Grouchy, but was actually broken up into divisional units, and used by the infantry commanders.
A. Create a new French Force - the cavalry reserve under Murat: 4/ 11" (V) Aggressive. It consists of the divi-
sions of Latour, Nansouty, and Grouchy. Remove the Dutch horse battery from Mortier, and give it to this Force.
B. Murat's Force deploys behind Mortier's corps.
C. Reduce the radii of the other French corps commanders accordingly.

4. Ru ian Reinforcements
Prior to falling back on Friedland, Bennigsen had detached two divisions to guard against the French forces at
Konigsberg. These included the Prussian corps of General Lestocq, the last Prussian forces still in the field after the dis-
astrous 1806 campaign. It is doubtful whether or not the constricted battlefield would have made these forces useful
to Bennigsen, but if players would like to add to the Russian army, then include these:
A. At the end of Tum 2, and each tum thereafter until this occurs, the allied commander should roll one die. If the
die is equal to or less than the number of the current tum, Lestocq's Force arrives to reinforce Bennigsen. It will
enter from the eastern board-edge (behind the river). Raise the allied army's number of Forces by one and
break-point by two.

Pru sian Corps: Lestocq (V) 2 / 7"

P/1 Prussian line Trained SSP
P/2 Prussian fusiliers & Light info Veteran 6SP
P/3 Prussian grenadiers Veteran SSP
P/4 Uhlans & Hussars Veteran SSP
1 12-pdr Foot BIT
 Friedland "

Labels for the Friedland Scenario (Cut and paste to unit bases)
Napoleon (Great) Gd: 6-pdr Gd Horse B LC/2 Cuirassiers
VI: Ney (V) 3 /11" Agg Gd: 6-pdr Gd Horse C LC/3 Lambert (Hussars)
VI/l/l Maucune SK2 Gd: 6-pdr Gd Horse D LC/4 Dorochov (Hussars)
VI/l/2 Marcognet SK2 I: Victor 3 / 14" Cautiou LC: 6-pdr Horse A
VI/2/l Roguet (Legere) SK2 1/1/1 Labruyere SK2 LC: 6-pdr Horse B
VI/2/2 Labasse SK2 1/1/2 Barrois SK2 Right: Gortchakov (V) 3
VI/3/l Bardet (Legere) SK2 1/2/1 Pacthod (Legere) SK2 8: Dochturov 4 / 5"
VI/C: Colbert (Chas eurs) 1/2/2 Darricau SK2 8/1 Engelhardt
VI/D/l Perreymond 1/3/1 Frere (Legere) SK2 8/2 Sakomelski (Dragoons)
VI/D/2 Fre ia 1/3/2 Girard SK2 8: 12-pdr Foot A
VI: l2-pdr Foot A I: Beaumont (Hussars) 8: 12-pdr foot B
VI: l2-pdr Foot B I/D/1 Margaron 8: 6-pdr Horse
VI: 4-pdr Horse I/D/2 Laplanche 7: en 4/4"
R: Lannes (V) 1/ 15 I/D/3 Thielemann 7/ 1 Zaposki (Grenadiers)
R/l/l Ruffin SKI I: 4-pdr Horse A 7/2 Line
R/l/2 Conroux SKI I: 4-pdr Horse B 7: l2-pdr foot A
R/l/3 Coehorn SKI I: 4-pdr Horse C 7: 12-pdr foot B
R/2/l Vedel (Legere) SK2 3: Sacken 3/8"
R/2/2 Harispe SK2 Bennigsen (Poor) 3/1 Uschakov
R/3/l SuBmilch Left: Bagratian (V) 2 3/2 Titov
R/3/2 Saxon line AG: Rayevsky (V) 2 / 8 3/3 Netting
R/C/l (Carab & Cuir) AG/1 Jager Brigade SKI 3: l2-pdr foot A
R/C/2 (Cuirassiers) AG/2 Ogarev (Jagers) SKI 3: 12-pdr foot B
R: Saxon 6-pdr Hor e AG/3 Fritsch (Jagers) SKI RC: Uvarov (V) 3 / 3" Agg
VITI: Mortier (V) 3/ 14 Agg AG/4 Cavalry (Hu sars) RC/l Cossacks SK2
VIII/l/l Venux (Legere) SK2 AG: 6-pdr Horse RC/2 Lourkovski (Hussars)
VIII/l/2 Gency SKI S: Markov 3 / 3" R: Constantine (V) 4 / 8"
VIII/2/l Kozinski SKI S/l R/1 Deperadovich
VIII/2/2 Sokolnicki S/2 (with Grenadiers) R/2 Bachoutzki
VIII/C/l Dragoons 6: Lovov 4/4" R/3 Alexseyev
VIII/C/2 Hussars 6/1 Rachmaninov R/4 Gersdorf
VITI: l2-pdr Foot A 6/2 Glouchkov R/S Kollogirov (Gd Cav)
VIll: l2-pdr Foot B 6: l2-pdr foot A R: l2-pdr foot A
VITI: 4-pdr Horse (Dutch) 6: l2-pdr foot B R: l2-pdr foot B
Guard: Be siere (V) 3/ 14" 2: Ostermann 5/4" R: 12-pdr foot C
G/l/l Dorsenne SK2 2/1 Mazovski C: Platov (V) 1 / 8" Agg
C/l Cossacks SK2
G/l/2 Soules SK2 2/2 Sukin
C/2 Cos acks SK2
G/ l/3 Reveval (Fusiliers) SK2 2: 12-pdr foot A
C/ 3 Cossacks SK2
G/2/l Lepic 2: l2-pdr foot B
C/4 Cossacks SK2
G/2/2 Guyot LC: Gallitzin (V) 2 / 9" Agg C: 6-pdr Horse
Gd: 6-pdr Gd Horse A LC/1 Korff (Drag & UbI)
 But Wellington cried, "Up Guards, and shoot The Battle Of
straight!"

-Victor Hugo, Les Miserables. Waterloo

18 June, 1815
So much has been written about the battle of Waterloo that it
seems superfluous to add anything else. Although it was a rather
"medium-sized" struggle compared to the immense slaughters of the 1809-13 period, its role as the
final defeat of Napoleon has assured it a place as the signature battle of the Napoleonic Wars.
Furthermore, all the sides engaged immediately romanticized the battle, surprisingly the French more
so than anyone else. By the time Victor Hugo was writing his melodramatic Waterloo scenes, nearly
two generations after the fact, the battle had become a legend of irresistible romantic power.
The battlefield finds the Duke of Wellington leading an army in many ways inferior to the force he
had honed in the Peninsula. Furthermore, Wellington has misjudged Napoleon's intent, and has
deployed his line with a powerful right, although Napoleon's initial assault would fall on his left. And
most crucially, Wellington has chosen to stand only because he has been assured of the aide of Blucher's
Army of the Rhine; a risky gambit, since the Prussians were several miles away and still smarting from
a serious defeat two days earlier at Ligny.
Napoleon, for his part, has already made some crippling errors by the time the armies have
deployed at Mont St. Jean. A third of his army is out of reach of the battlefield, under the command
of Grouchy, the most freshly-minted of the marshals. Grouchy's "pursuit" of Blucher has failed, and
worse, has surrendered the interior position to the numerically-superior allies. Napoleon has shown
astonishing lethargy in the past few days, increasingly to the distress of his corps commanders. At break-
fast he prophesied that his army - as soon as he felt the ground was dry enough - would gobble up
the contemptible English comme un pedt-dejuner ("like a breakfast.")
And so the decision would be left to the army not yet present: the Prusslan Army of the Rhine.
Historian Peter Hofschroer has called Waterloo "the German victory," and rightly so. It was Blucher's
army, holding Grouchy at bay in their rear, and marching all morning and day toward the guns at Mont
St. Jean, that turned the tide_ The Prussians first occupied Napoleon's reserves, depriving him of a
masse de decision, and then built up relentlessly along his flank.
You know the rest.

The Scenario:
The weather is Overcast, and variable. The ground is Soft. The game's Basic Length is 7
turns. All towns are hard cover, and one base each.
Garrisons: The Anglo-Allied army has an Elite 9SP garrison in the "town" of
Hougomont, a Veteran 4SP garrison in La Haye Sainte, and a Conscript 10SP garrison in
Braine l'Alleud.
The French army is "Fair." Its Break Point is 17.
The Anglo-Allied army is "Fair." Its Break Point is 13.
The Prussian army is "Fair." Calculate its Break Point as its component Forces arrive.
Prussian Forces Enter: Napoleon I
At the end of certain turns, the allied player rolls to enter Prussian forces. If the roll is suc- The Duke of Wellington
cessful, those forces will enter in the first pulse of the next tum. Feldmarschall Prince Blucher
End of Tum 1: Roll S2 for Bliicher and the IV Korps
End of Tum 2: Roll S4" "
End of Tum 3: if not already entered, Bliicher enters with IV Korps. Roll S2 for II Korp .
End of Tum 4: Roll S4 for II Korps.
End of Tum 5: if not already entered, II Korps enters.
I Korps enters on the first pul e of the tum after II Korps, whatever that may be.
 WaterlOO .

Ro ter for the Anglo-Allied Army

ommander: Wellington (Great)
Weather: Overea t, Variable (16") _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Army' Break Point: 13
Generals Available: 2 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
This is a Napoleonic Army of 5 Forces. (Wellington has already deployed one general (Vandeleur) to form a cavalry
detachment.)

I Corp : the Prince of Orange 3 / 10"

1st Divi ion: Cooke
1/1/1 Maitland (Foot Guards) Guard 8SP~-----------------
1/1/2 Byng (Foot Guards) Guard uSP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
3rd Division: A1ten
1/3/1 Halkett (Br. Line) Veteran 6SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
1/3/20mpteda (KGL infantry) Veteran 6SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
1/3/3 Kielmansegge (Hanoverian) Conscript SSP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
2nd Dutch/Belgian Div: Perponcher
1/2D/l Bijlandt (Dutch) Conscript 6SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
1/2D/2 Bernard (Nas au) Conscript 8SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Corp Artillery
I: 9-pdr Horse __
I: 9-pdr Foot A _
I: 9-pdr Foot B _
II Corp : Hill 2 / 9"
2nd Divi ion: Clinton
11/2/1 Adam (Lt. & Highlanders) Elite lOSP~-----------------
JI/2/2 du Plat (KGL infantry) Veteran 6SP___- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
11/2/3 Halkett (Hanoverians) Conscript SSP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
4th Divi ion: Colville
II/4/1 Mitchell (Br. Line) Veteran SSP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Corp Artillery
ll: 9-pdr Horse __
ll: 9-pdr Foot _
Reserve Divi ion: Picton 2/12"
5th Division: Picton
R/S/1 Kempt (Briti h line) Veteran 6SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
R/S/2 Pack (British line) Veteran SSP=-_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
R/S/3 Vincke (Hanoverian) Conscript SSP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
6th Division: (Cole)
R/6/1 Lambert (British line) Veteran 6SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
R/6/2 Best (Hanoverian) Conscript 4SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Nassau Brigade Veteran 7SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Corps Artillery
R: 9-pdr Foot A _
R: 9-pdr Foot B _
R: 6-pdr Horse __
Brunswick Divi ion: Heinemann 3 / 6"
B/1 Light Brigade Veteran 8SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
B/2 Line Brigade Veteran 7SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
B/3 Brunswick Lt. Cavalry Veteran 4SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Corp Artillery
B: 6-pdr Horse __
 " Waterloo

Roster for the Anglo-Allied army, continued:

Cavalry Corps: Uxbridge (V) 2 114" Aggre ive

C/l Somer et (Guards) Guard 9Sp___- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
C/2 Posonby (Dragoons) Veteran 6SP
C/3 Domberg (Lt. Dragoons) Veteran 6 S P - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
C/6 Arenschildt (KGL cay)
C/7 Dutch-Belgian cay
Corp Artillery ~~~er:~p:~~=P=================================~_
C: 9-pdr Horse A __
C: 9-pdr Horse B __
C: 6-pdr Horse A __
C: 6-pdr Horse B _

[detachment]: Vandeleur (V) 3 I 6 " Aggre ive

V/4 Vandeleur (Lt. Dragoons) Veteran 6SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
VIs Grant & Vivian (Hussars) Elite 9SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
V: 6-pdr Horse A __
V: 6-pdr Horse B __

Roster for die Rheinarmee

Commander: Bliicher (Good)
Army's Break Point: ? _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
(Prussian army morale is "Fair." Calculate its Break Point as its component Forces aniue.)
Generals Available: a total of 2, once all three Forces have arrived.
This is a Napoleonic Army. The number of Forces will increase as they arrive.

I Korp : Ziethen 3 I 6"

1 t Brigade: Steinmetz
1/1/1 Othengraven
1/1/2 Laurens
1/1/3 Riichel ~;~~~:~ ~~;~~=================================
Conscript 4SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Trained SSP_ _ __ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
I/C Roeder Oight cay)
Corps Artillery:
I: 6-pdr Horse __

II Korp : PITch 3 I 12"

5th Brigade: Tippelskirch
II/s/l Cardell Veteran 7SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
II/s/2 Petersdorff Veteran 6SP:=-_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
II/s/3 Roebel Conscript 4SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
7th Brigade: Brau e
II/7/1 Mirbach Veteran 6SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
II/7/2 Sack Trained SSP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
8th Brigade: Bose
II/8/1 Reckow Veteran 6SP=:-_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
II/8/2 Rangow Conscript SSP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
II/CI Jiirgass Oight cay) Trained SSP._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
II/C2 Sohr Oight cay) Trained 4SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Corp Artillery:
II: 6-pdr Horse A __
II: 6-pdr Horse B _ _
 WaterlOO .

Roster for the Rheinarmee, continued:

IV Korp : Billow 2 / 20"

13th Brigade: Hake
IV/13/1 Lettow Veteran 6SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
IV/13/2 (Landwehr) Conscrip t 7SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___
14th Brigade: Funck
IV/14/1 Reichenbach Veteran SSP~------------------
IV/14/2 Brandenstein Conscript 4SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___
IV/14/3 Pawels COMcript 4SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___
15th Brigade: Lo thin
IV/IS/1 LObell Trained SSP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
IV/IS/2 (Silesian landwehr) Trained 7SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
16th Brigade: Hiller
IV/16/1 Creilsheim Trained SSP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
IV/16/2 (Silesian landwehr) Trained 7SP"_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___
IV/Cl Schwerin (Hus. & Uhlans) Veteran 6SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
IV/C2 Sydow Oandwehr cay) Conscript 7SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Corp Artillery:
IV: 6-pdr Horse A __
IV: 6-pdr Horse B _
IV: 6-pdr Horse C _
IV: 12-pdr Foot A __
IV: 12-pdr Foot B __
IV: 12-pdr Foot C __
IV: Howitzer BIT

The Battlefield
of Waterloo
 " Waterloo

Roster for l'armee duNord

Commander: Napoleon (Average)
Weather: Overcast, Variable (16") _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Army's Break Point: 17 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Generals Available: 3
This is a Napoleonic Army of 6 Forces. Napoleon has no ADCs, however, be does have Marshal Ney (V) 4
Aggre ive whom he must assign as a Wing Commander over any two or more Forces in the army prior to begin-
ning the game.

Imperial Guard: Drouot 3 / 16"

1st Division: Friant
G/1/1 O.G. Grenadiers a Pied Guard 12SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___
Gu~d 9SP______________________________
G/1/2 M.G. Grenadiers
2nd Divi ion: Morand
G/2/1 O.G. Chas eurs a Pied Guard 12SP
Guard 10SP- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
G/2/2 M.G. Chasseurs
3rd Divi ion: Duhesme
G/3/1 Chartrand (Y.G.) Elite 8SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
G/3/2 Guye (Y.G.) Elite 7SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Guard Cavalry: Lefebvre-Desnouettes
G/C/1 Gd. Light Cavalry Guard 12SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
G/C/2 Gd. Hvy. Cavalry Guard uSP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Corps Artillery:
G: O.G. 12-pdr Foot A __
G: O.G. 12-pdr Foot B __
G: O.G. 12-pdr Foot C _
G: O.G. 12-pdr Foot D _
G: O.G. 6-pdr Horse A _
G: O.G. 6-pdr Horse B _
G: O.G. 6-pdr Horse C __
G: O.G. 6-pdr Horse D __

I Corp : D'Erlon 3 / 12"

1st Division: Quiot
1/1/1 Quiot Veteran 6SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
1/1/2 Bourgeois Trained SSP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___
2nd Division: Donzelot
1/2/1 Schmitz (Legere) Veteran 7SP._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
1/2/2 Aulard Veteran 6SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
3rd Division: Marcognet
1/3/1 Nogues Veteran 6SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
1/3/2 Grenier Veteran 6SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
4th Division: Durutte
1/4/1 Pegot Trained SSP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
1/4/2 Brue Veteran SSP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
I/C Jacquinot (Hussars, Lancers) Veteran 7SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Corp Artillery:
I: 12-pdr Foot__
I: 6-pdr Horse __
 WaterlOO .

Roster for the Armee du Nord, continued:

II Corp : Reille 2 / 14"

5th Division: Bachelu
II/s/l Husson Veteran 6SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
1I/s/2 Campi Veteran 6SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
6th Divi ion: Jerome
1I/6/l Bauduin (Legere) Veteran lOSP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
II/6/2 Soye Veteran 9SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
9th Division: Foy
11/9/1 Gauthier Trained 6SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
IJ/9/2 Jamin (Legere) Veteran 8SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
II/C Pire (Chasseurs & Lancers) Veteran sSP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Corp Artillery:
ll: l2-pdr Foot __
ll: 6-pdr Horse __

VI Corps: Lobau (V) 2 / 12"

19th Division: Simmer
VI/19/l Bellair Veteran 6SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
VI/19/2 Thevenet Veteran 6SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
20th Division: Jeanin
VI/20/l Bony (Legere) Veteran 7SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Attached Cavalry:
VI/Cl Domon (Cha eurs) Trained 4SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
VI/C2 Subervie (Lancers & Chas.) Veteran 6SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Corp Artillery:
VI: l2-pdr Foot __
VI: 6-pdr Horse A __
VI: 6-pdr Horse B __

III Cavalry Corps: Kellerman (V) 1 / 8"

lIIC/ll'Heritier (Dragoon & Cuir.) Veteran 8SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
IIIC/2 Blancard (Carabiniers) Elite sSP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
IIIC/3 Donop (Cuirassiers) Elite sSP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Corps Artillery:
lllC: 6-pdr Horse A _
lllC: 6-pdr Horse B _

IV Cavalry Corp : Milhaud (V) 2 / 8 "

NC/l Watier (Cuirassiers) Elite 7SP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
NC/2 Farine (Cuirassiers) Elite sSP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
NC/3 Vial (Cuirassiers) Elite sSP_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Corps Artillery:
IVC: 6-pdr Horse A __
IVC: 6-pdr Horse B _
 " Waterloo

Alternative Waterloos, Play-Balancing, and What-Ifs:

If you have never contemplated alternative Waterloo , you can't really call yourself a wargamer!

1. Weather
Given the French superiority in artillery, it is likely that hard ground and better visibility would have greatly improved
Napoleon's chances for battering the weak allied left with his grand battery. Change the weather to "Normal" and the
ground to "Hard," with variation or no variation, as you prefer. That means the battle will start earlier, too. Change the
Basic Length to 8 turns, and add one to all turn numbers for arriving Prussian forces. (Tho e scheduled to arrive at the
end of Turn 2 will arrive at the end of Turn 3 instead, etc.)

2. Napoleon ha a Better Day

Chronic ulcers, a fumbling chief of staff, a confused Marshal Ney, a gout-ridden Marshal Mortier, dyslexic aides who
mis-write orders for infantry formations ... Napoleon made some bad decisions in the 1815 campaign, but it wasn't all
his fault. This option assumes that the French command system of 1815 operated a bit more like the army of 1805.
A. Upgrade Napoleon's skill rating to "Good" or "Great," depending upon your preferences.

3. The Grouchy Option

After Napoleon split his army on the 17th, he surrendered the interior position to the allies, and thus there was no real
possibility that Grouchy's wing could have arrived. Grouchy might, however, have been able to pin a more substantial
portion of Blucher's army near Wavre. Furthermore, Napoleon might have cho en a different composition for
Grouchy's force, resulting in different forces at Waterloo.
A. Option One: Grouchy gets aggressive. Thielemann's small corps is mauled at Wavre, caving in the rear of
Blucher's army and forcing the Prussians to detail more forces as a rear-guard. The Prus ian I Korps will not
arrive at Waterloo, and all rolls for the other Prussian forces suffer a +1 modifier.
B. Option Two: Alternative Grouchy. Napoleon gives Grouchy the understrength VI Corps and instead takes the
III Corps with him to Waterloo. Add this Force to the French OB, in place of the VI Corps, and upgrade army
break-point accordingly.

III Corps Vandamme (V) 2/14" Aggressive

8th Division: Lefol
III/8/l Brice (Legere) Veteran 8SP, SK2
III/8/2 Corsin Veteran 6SP, SK2
10th Division: Habert
III/l0/l Gengoult Veteran 8SP, SK2
1II/10/2 Dupeyroux Veteran 8SP, SK2
11th Divi ion: Berthezene
1II/11/l Dufour Veteran 7SP, SK2
III/11/2 Logarde Veteran 6SP, SK2
VI/C1 Domon (Chasseurs) Trained 4SP
Corp Artillery:
1 12-pdr Foot BTY
1 6-pdr Horse BTY

4. C'est la Trahison!
Historians have long argued over the state of the morale of l'armee du Nord. On one hand, a majority of the men were
volunteers and professional soldiers, since Napoleon had been unable for political reasons to raise conscription in 1815.
That meant that the soldiers were largely veterans. On the other hand, there was still a lot of bitterness left from 1814,
between those who were Bonapartists and those who were simply French patriots. The double-switching of Marshal
Ney and especially the last-minute treason of General Bourmont gave the men good cau e for suspicion of their offi-
cers. To make matters worse, Napoleon deliberately lied to his men at Waterloo, telling them that Grouchy was
approaching, when he knew it was more Prussians. When that mass of soldiery opened fire on the exhausted French,
a rumor spread that Grouchy had switched sides with his whole wing, as Marmont had done in 1814.
A. Change the French army morale to "ShaI--y." The army break-point is 14.
 WaterlOO .

5. Wellington 's Options

The complexities of Wellington's OB were in some part dictated by politics and the nature of his polyglot army.
Although a corps system existed on paper, in reality Wellington managed the battle much as he had done in the early
Peninsular period; one division at a time.
A. Picton's ratings in this scenario reflect the fact that he had been wounded two days earlier at Quatre Bras, and
he was doing the work not only for his 5th Division, but also for the absent Lowry Cole's 6th Division. You can
postulate that Picton was not wounded, and rate: Picton (V) 1/ 12". While you're at it, you can bring the
Duke of Brunswick back from the dead at Quatre Bras, and replace Heinemann with: Brunswick (V) 2 /6".
B. Wellington had a number of formations in the immediate vicinity of Waterloo. Many of these were sub-par
quality units and were being used to guard communications in the army's rear (such as 10,000 Hanoverian
militia in Antwerp.) But there were also important British formations that would have substantially increased
Hill's II Corps. Change that Force to read as follows:
n Corp : HiU 2 / 18"
2nd Divi io n : Clin to n
II/2/1 Adam (Br. Light & Highlanders) Elite lOSP, SK2
II/2/2 du Plat (KGL infantry) Veteran 6SP, SK2
II/2/3 Halkett (Ilanoverians) Conscript sSP
4 th Divisio n : Colville
II/4/1 Mitchell (Br. Line) Veteran SSP, SK2
II/4/2 Johnstone (Br. Line) Veteran 7SP, SK2
II/4/3 Lyon (Hanoverian) Conscript SSP
Prince Fred erick's "Corp "
II/F/1 Anthing (West Indian) Conscript 6SP, SKI
II/F/2 Stedman (Dutch) Con cript SSP, SKI
II/F/3 de Eerens (Dutch) Conscript SSP, SKI
Corp ArtiUery:
1 9-pdr Foot STY
1 9-pdr Horse STY
1 12-pdr (Dutch) Foot BTY

6. More Prus ians

Blucher's army, tired and still smarting from their defeat at Ligny two day earlier, was strung out along twenty miles
of road, while "old Forwards" urged them on with jokes and oaths and reminders of their duty. He managed to get
about half his army onto the field by sundown; enough to defeat Napoleon, as it turned out. But if you would like to
add more Prussians, it is certainly feasible that they could have joined the battle. This variant brings the Prussian I and
II Korps up to (near) full strength as they enter:

I Ko rps : Zie the n 3 / 16" n Korps : Pirch 3/17"

1 t Brigad e : Ste inmetz 5th Brigad e : Tippelskirch
1/1/1 Othengraven Veteran 6SP, SK2 II/S/1 Cardell Veteran 7SP, SK2
1/1/2 Laurens Trained SSP, SKI II/S/2 Petersdorff Veteran 6SP, SK2
1/1/3 Riichel Con cript 4SP, SKI II/S/3 Roebel Conscript 4SP, SKI
2nd Brigade : Pirch n 6th Brigad e: Krafft
1/2/1 Kemphen Veteran 7SP, SK2 11/6/1 Schmidt Veteran 7SP, SK2
1/2/2 Quadt Trained SSP, SKI 11/6/2 Bismarck Conscript SSP, SKI
1/2/3 Winterfeld Conscript 4SP, SKI 7th Brigade: Brau e
3 rd Brigade: Jagow 11/7/1 Mirbach Veteran 6SP, SK2 MX
1/3/1 Seydlitz Veteran 6SP, SK2 11/7/2 Sack Trained SSP, SKI
1/3/2 Hymmen Trained 6SP, SK2 8th Brigad e : Bo e
1/3/3 Friccius Conscript 4SP, SKI 11/8/1 Reckow Veteran 6SP, SK2 MX
l/C Roeder Oight cay) Trained SSP 11/8/2 Rangow Conscript SSP, SKI
Corp Artillery: II/C1 Jiirgas Oight cay) Trained SSP
3 12-pdr Foot BTYs II/C2 Sohr Oight cay) Trained 4SP
2 6-pdr Horse BlYs Corp ArtiUery:
1 Howitzer BlY 2 12-pdr Foot BTYs
2 6-pdr Ilorse BlYs
1 Howitzer BTY
 Labels for the Waterloo Scenario (cut and paste to unit base)

Wellington (Great) Napoleon (Average) IIlC/2 Blancard (Carabiniers)

I: Orange 3 I 10" G: Drouot 3 I 16" mC/3 Donop (Cuiras iers)
1/1/1 Maitland (Foot Guards) SK2 Gllll O.G. Grenadiers a Pied SK2 mc: 6-pdr Horse A
1/1/2 Byng (Foot Guards) SK2 G/1/2 M.G. Grenadiers SK2 mc: 6-pdr Ilorse B
1/3/1 Halkett (Br. Line) SK2 G/2/1 O.G. Chasseurs a Pied SK2 IVC: Milhaud (V) 2 I 8"
1/3/2 Ompteda (KGL infantry) SK2 G/2/2 M.G. Cha eurs SK2 IVC/l Watier (Cuira siers)
1/3/3 Kielmansegge (Hanov.) SKI G/3/1 Chartrand (V.G.) SK2 IVC/2 Farine (Cuirassiers)
1/20/1 Bijlandt (Dutch) SKI G/3/2 Guye (V.G.) SK2 IVC/3 Vial (Cuirassiers)
1/20/2 Bernard ( assau) SKI G/C/l Gd. Light Cavalry IVC: 6-pdr Horse A
I: 9-pdr Horse G/C/2 Gd. Hvy. Cavalry IVC: 6-pdr Hor e B
I: 9-pdr Foot A G: O.G. 12-pdr Foot A
I: 9-pdr Foot B G: O.G. 12-pdr Foot B Blucher (Good)
II: Hill 2 I 9" G: O.G. 12-pdr Foot C I: Zi then 3 I 6"
II/2/1 Adam (Lt & Highlanders) SK2 G: O.G. 12-pdr Foot 0 1/1/1 Othengraven SK2
II/2/2 du Plat (KGL infantry) SK2 G: O.G. 6-pdr I lorse A 1/1/2 Laurens SKI
II/2/3 Halkett (Hanoverians) G: O.G. 6-pdr I Iorse B 1/1/3 Ruchel SKI
II/4/1 Mitchell (Br. Line) SK2 G: O.G. 6-pdr Ilorse C I/C Roeder (light cav)
II: 9-pdr Horse G: O.G. 6-pdr Ilorse 0 I: 6-pdr Horse
II: 9-pdr Foot I: D Erion 3 I 12" II Korp : Pirch 3 I 12"
R: Picton 2 I 12" 1/1/1 Quiot SK2 IIlsll Cardell SK2
RIs/l Kempt (British line) SK2 1/1/2 Bourgeois SK2 II/s/2 Petersdorff SK2
RIs/2 Pack (British line) SK2 1/2/1 Schmitz (Legere) SK2 II/s/3 Roebel SKI
RIs/3 Vincke (Hanoverian) SKI 1/2/2 Aulard SK2 II/7/1 Mirbach SK2 MX
R/6/1 Lambert (British line) SK2 1/3/1 ogue SK2 II/7/2 Sack SKI
R/6/2 Best (Hanoverian) SKI 1/3/2 Grenier SK2 II/8/1 Reckow SK2 MX
Nassau Brigade SK2 1/4/1 pegot SK2 II/8/2 Rangow SKI
R: 9-pdr Foot A 1/4/2 Brue SK2 II/CI Jurgass (light cav)
R: 9-pdr Foot B I/C Jacquinot (Hu Lancer) II/C2 Sohr (light cav)
R: 6-pdr Horse I: 12-pdr Foot II: 6-pdr Horse A _
B: Heinemann 3 I 6" I: 6-pdr Horse II: 6-pdr Horse B _
Bll Light Brigade SK2 II: Reille 2 114" IV Korp : BUlow 2 I 20"
B/2 Line Brigade SK2 IIlsll Husson SK2 IV/t3/1 Lettow SK2
B/3 Brunswick Lt. Cavalry II/s/2 Campi SK2 IV/13/2 (Landwehr)
B: 6-pdr Ilorse II /6/1 Bauduin (Legere) SK2 IV/14/t Reichenbach SK2
C: Uxbridge (V) 2 114" Agg. II/6/2 Soye SK2 IV/14/2 Branden tein
C/l Somerset (Guards) II/9/1 Gauthier SK2 IV/14/3 Pawel
C/2 Posonby (Dragoon ) II/9/2 Jamin (Legere) SK2 IVl1sl1 LObell SK2
C/3 Dornberg (Lt. Dragoon) II/C Pin~ (Chasseurs & Lancers) IV/ls/2 (Silesian landwehr) SKI
C/6 Arenschildt (KGL cav) II: 12-pdr Foot IV/16/t Creil heim SK2
C/7 Dutch-Belgian Cav. II: 6-pdr Horse IV/t6/2 (Sile ian landwehr)
C: 9-pdr Horse A VI: Lobau (V) 2 I 12" IV/Ct Schwerin (Hussars & Uhlans)
C: 9-pdr Horse B VI/19/1 Bellair SK2 IVIC2 Sydow (Iandwehr cavalry)
C: 6-pdr Horse A VI/19/2 Thevenet SK2 IV: 6-pdr Horse A
C: 6-pdr Ilorse B VII2011 Bony (Legere) SK2 IV: 6-pdr Horse B
V: Vandeleur (V) 3 I 6" Agg VI/C1 Domon (Chasseurs) IV: 6-pdr Horse C
V/4 Vandeleur (Lt. Dragoons) VI/C2 Subervie (Lancers & Cha .) IV: 12-pdr Foot A
VIs Grant & Vivian (Hu ars) VI: 12-pdr Foot IV: 12-pdr Foot B
V: 6-pdr Horse A VI: 6-pdr Horse A IV: t2-pdr Foot C
V: 6-pdr Horse B VI: 6-pdr Horse B IV: Howitzer BTY
mc: Kellerman (V) 1 I 8"
mC/l I'Heritier (Dragoon & Cuir.)
Ap. Appendices
You do not need the appendices in order to know how to play the cenarios included with Grande Armee. In fact, if
you've been reading up to this point, then you're done: you're ready to play! Come back to this later, after you've got-
ten a good working knowledge of the game. The appendices provide useful information to help you get the mo t out of
Grande Annee, and in particular to design your own scenarios.

Appendix I explains how the game's scales and basing system work, and demonstrates how to convert historical
Orders of Battle (OBs) into Grande Annee units. These are the methods used in designing the scenarios in this book.
This will give you more perspective on why units have the SPs that they do, how things like divisional artillery and
mixed brigades of infantry and cavalry are handled in the scenario design proce ,and how officers are assigned their
ratings.

Appendix II provides an exhau tive list of the major officers of the Napoleonic period, organized by nationality. You
can use this as an encyclopedia of names you might encounter when designing your own battle ,and needing to estab-
lish the ratings for officers. This section also provides a list of exceptional divisional commanders for each army, if you
would like to choose from among those names when deploying a general in the midst of a game.

Appendix ill is a compendium of the unit types for all the Napoleonic combatants, and how those units would be
rated using the Grande Armee system of morale classes and values. Here you will also find the distinctions between
heavy and light cavalry explained, and a note for each army on what types of artillery it would field under which cir-
cumstances.

Finally you will find the Eclaireur (the 'scout'). This is a handy quick-reference section of condensed rules and all the
major tables needed for play. I recommend that you photocopy the Eclaireur and keep it nearby as you play. In nine-
ty percent of the ca es you will not need to open the rulebook during a game; the Eclaireur should provide the answers.
 Appendix I: Design-Your-Own
No matter what scale we choose to represent a battle in
miniature, certain abstractions and simplifications are
inevitable. Many games prefer to fudge historical OBs until
they resemble the game. Battalions become standardized to
equal numbers of figures, in increments conveniently divisi-
ble by the game's figure-per-base ratio. (Ever notice how
French battalions always seem to have either 9 or 12 figures,
no matter how many men were actually in them?) Rather
than do that, Grande Armee uses actual historical OBs, then
applies the term "brigade" as a generic multi-battalion or
multi-squadron entity.
Grande Armee is designed for those players who want
to fight the major, decisive battles of the Napoleonic wars.
Consequently the brigade is our basic tabletop unit_ What we
are really doing is cobbling together the battalions that would
be operating together in some kind of cohesion, and calling
that a "unit," entirely for game purposes. You must imagine
that a stand of infantry represents several battalions operat-
ing together, plus the empty spaces between them. The same
is true for cavalry: a stand represents several squadrons.
And what about the fact that these units represent sub-
units of different strengths, abilities, and even functions? We
do our best to average. In a Prussian unit, for inStance, where
the grenadier companies of all the regiments have been
pulled out to form a massed grenadier brigade somewhere
else, we might rate that unit a notch lower than we would if
those grenadiers were left in. In the end, it's entirely up to
the players themselves; they get to play game designer.
Appendix III will provide you with the statistics for the vari-
ous unit-types of each army. It will be your job to decide
how to apply them. Does a cavalry brigade comprise
Hussars, Chasseurs, and Dragoons, all mixed together? Ask
yourself which unit type was most numerous in that unit, and
if no clear majority appears, use your own judgment.
Unlike most games that try to depict process, Grande
Armee asks you to concentrate on outcomes. What would
be the effectiveness of this brigade, overall? That's your bot-
tom-line when designing units for your own scenarios.
As with any brigade-level game, one must imagine that
a unit represents any number of possible configurations of
battalions. Perhaps it is something like the French ordre
mixte, with a linear center, flanking columns, skirmishers out
front, and reserves in the rear. Perhaps it ls more like the
Russian double line, with grenadiers stiffening the regular
Infantry. In any event, we assume that the brigade com-
mander on the scene will be making the decisions about the
formations his battalions will adopt. If he is charged by cav-
alry, we hope he will form square. It is not the province of
the commander of the army to order each battalion and
squadron, or even whole regiments, to change formation at
every change of circumStance. Like any army commander,
we depend upon the competence of our subordinates.
1 . 0 Th e Units and the Scale
Grande Armee is a "brigade game," meaning that the
units of infantry and cavalry we place on the table rep-
resent brigades. There is no figure-scale, since a single
ba e of figures on the table represents a variable num-
ber of men. The ground scale of the game is essential-
ly 1:100. One inch oftabletop surface equals 100 yards
of ground.
The choice of a 3" square base was not simply
drawn from a hat, nor was it elected because other
popular games have used it. In fact, it represents the
frontage (at our ground scale) occupied by two full-
strength infantry battalions in three-rank lines. In
other words, three inches is the fighting edge of an
infantry brigade, and the depth represents the second
line of units in that brigade, whether in line or column.
(In an attack posture, the battalions in column would
often be formed in a checkerboard style, leaving
enough room b tween them to form out into line.)
Either way, for attack or defense, we have a roughly
squari h shape: the "area" of a brigade, even though
much of it is empty space.
Three inches also represents the frontage occupied
by two full-strength cavalry squadrons deployed in
lines of battle. The other squadrons would be at least
60 yards behind the first rank, and subsequent
squadrons would be in re erve. The British, for
instance, preferred a reserve about 200 yards behind
the second rank. The Prussians had a number of vari-
ations, but again a three-wave pattern was standard.
The Ru sians tended to prefer a more linear formation
with a greater frontage, but this also meant that they
needed more space between the squadrons, in order to
allow for wheeling of the squadrons. (Deploying a sin-
gle squadron from column into line required 400 feet
of open field!) So a cavalry stand, like infantry, repre-
sents several tightly packed groups of men, separated
by the open spaces they would need to change forma-
tions and facings.
2.0 Morale Classes and Scale
Grande Armee uses a simple method to depict the
relationship between numerical strength and morale.
Each morale level uses a different scale. If designing a
scenario from scratch, players will have to calculate
these things themselves. They should adhere to the fol-
lowing system of six morale c1as es:
 Appendix I: Design-Your-own _
Gu ard A category that should be reserved for
the most elite of an army's units. Only a
handful are at this level.
Elite Tough as nails. The finest regiments in
the regular army. These are often the
Grenadier formations. This would also
include a few exceptional line regiments.
Vet eran A fine unit, well-trained and equipped
and well-led.
Tr ain ed These are "regulars:" men who were
drafted into the service and are led com-
petently. The vast majority of infantry in
this period falls into this category.
Conscript The Germans call this category
"Landwehr," and it represents a levee of
men from all walks of life, rather hastily
trained, and equipped as best possible.
Raw We have reached the bottom of the bar-
rel. These men are little better than rab-
ble, and sometimes exactly that. Expect
to see their backs at the first sound of
gunfire.
2.1 Infantry Brigades
Whenever possible, use historical brigades as brigades
in the game. You should aim for infantry units which
represent anywhere from 1,500 to 4,000 men, with the
best sizes being in the middle. You must then decide on
the morale class you will give to that unit.
Now that you have chosen a brigade and given it a
morale rating, you must apply a scale ratio to it, to
determine how many Strength Points (SPs) the unit
will have in game terms. Depending upon the morale
grade, we apply different scale ratios. A Guard unit, for
instance, has one SP per every 200 men in that histor-
ical brigade, whereas a Conscript unit has one SP per
every 600.
API 2.1: Scale Ratios
Infantry Cavalry
Morale
SPs per men SPs per men
Guard 1:200 1:150
Elite 1:300 1:200
Veteran 1:400 1:250
Trained 1:500 1:300
Conscript 1:600 1:350
Raw 1:400
Use your ownjudgment when rounding numbers. It makes
sense to round up anything above 0-5-
2.2 Cavalry Brigades
Again, whenever possible, use historical brigades as
units in the game. Although technically assigned to
"regiments," cavalry usually operated in semi-inde-
pendent squadrons which were frequently grouped
together in brigades. (The first and second squadrons
of a French dragoon regiment might be serving in
Spain, and the third and fourth squadrons might be in
Germany, brigaded together with three squadrons
from another regiment, etc.)
Cavalry brigades are smaller, and we use a smaller
scale ratio, although we use the same system. You
should aim for cavalry units whose strength ranges
from 1,000 to 2,500 men. Assign the brigade a morale
value, then determine its SPs.
2.3 Avoid Super-Units, if Possible
Generally, it is best not to create any units with more
than about 12SPS. Indeed, the average should be
somewhere around 5-9, with higher ratings reserved
for special elite or Guards units. Remember that elite
units were often used in smaller formations, precisely
because they could do the job of many "normal"
troops. So there is nothing wrong with breaking down
the Guards into smaller units of 1,500 - 2,OO(} men,
while your line units might be brigades of 3,000 men.
Even with the smaller units, the Guards will still have
higher SP values.
2.4 Mixed Brigades
Early in the Napoleonic wars some of the allied armies
employed brigades which combined cavalry with
infantry. Normally these were primarily infantry for-
mations, with a few squadrons or perhaps an entire
regiment of light cavalry attached. Prussia retained
this concept through 1815, specifically for the benefits
of driving away French skirmishers and presenting
French infantry with the unpleasant task of simultane-
ously facing infantry and cavalry.
To represent an infantry brigade with a small unit
of cavalry attached, simply count the cavalrymen as
part of the unit's total strength, when calculating its
SPs (use the infantry ratios). Then add the designation
"MX" to its unit label. Mixed brigades get bonus dice in
combat, and have an advantage in skirmishing.
3. 0 Representing Artillery Units
A company of artillery comprised anywhere from six to
twelve guns, depending upon its type and nationality.
A typical 8-gun battery unlimbered and deployed for
action might occupy about 100-150 yards of front, but
its supporting "tail" of caissons, limbers, horses and

teamsters, etc, could stretch back 200 yards to the
rear.
In Grande Annee, we do not actually represent
with miniatures all the batteries that would have been
in action on a battlefield. First, our scale is too large to
show the small sections of "regimental" or "battalion"
guns that were often attached to infantry units. Their
firepower is assumed to be part of the infantry units
themselves. And second, we don't (directly) show the
regular foot batteries that were attached to most
infantry divisions or brigades. What, then, do we
depict using miniatures? We depict the heavy (usually,
but not always 12-pounder) batteries which were
assigned to corps or army reserves, and the lighter
(usually 3-6 pounder) batteries of horse artillery.
3. 1 Artillery Strength and Type
Because of the small size of artillery units, we do not
apply a scale based on morale, as we do for infantry
and cavalry. The quality of artillerists was more often
differentiated by their training and tactical doctrine, as
well as their equipment, rather than by their morale.
Gunners tended to be a brave lot, regardless of nation-
ality.
3.2 Factoring Divisional Artillery
We don't deploy guns on the table to show individual
light and medium companies of artillery that are
attached to infantry units, but we do "factor" them into
the strength of infantry units. This is important,
because not all divisions had the same level of artillery
support, and thus firepower.
When looking at an historical order of battle and
creating units for the game, note how much artillery
was assigned to a particular infantry division. Usually
it was one battery, but sometimes more, and some-
times none at all. However many batteries were
attached to that division, multiply that number of bat-
teries by two. This is the number of extra SPs that we
will factor in to all brigades in that division. Distribute
these SPs as equally as you can among the brigades of
that division.
Example: an infantry division has three infantry
brigades and one battery of artillery (2SPS). Two
brigades will each get a 1SP bonus, and the third is
out of luck. (Choose randomly, if you like.)
Another example: a division has three infantry
brigades, and two batteries (4SPs) of attached
artillery. Give each brigade 1SP, then randomly select
one brigade to get thefourth.
Appendix I: Design-Your-own
The Russians deployed very large batteries, with anywhere
from 50100% more cannon than other nations, but
Grande Annee does not renect this, other than to broaden
the frontage of Russian batteries. The Russian guns were
sound, horses were plentiful, and the men were brave, but
there were many problems which made a Russian battery less
effective than its smaller British or French counterparts. Poor
ofncer training resulted in atrocious tactical mistakes in the
early years. Russian generals, who almost never came from
the artillery, didn't appreciate their gunners. (By contrast,
the French had many old artillerists in the highest ranks, such
as Eblt!, lauriston, Drouot, Mannont, and of course
Napoleon himself.) Other nations devoted more manpower
to artillery than did the Russians. A Russian foot battery of
12 guns was served by 82 gunners. A French 8-gun battery,
by contrast, was served by 86 gunners. That's four more
men per gun in the French unit: a lot more hands for mov-
ing, aiming, and serving the piece. The most serious prob-
lems seem to have been bad powder and fuses. Depending
upon the campaign, as many as a third of Russian fuses and
howitzer shells might be duds. And there was less of it to
spare - Russian caissons carried 25% less ammunition per
gun than did the French.
4.0 Rating the Officers
The most important thing to remember about the rat-
ings of officers in Grande Armee is that we rate the
officer's abilitiesfor that particular day of battle. Like
all commanders, Napoleon had his off-days. He wasn't
always "Great." If we were recreating the battle of
Borodino, for instance, we would have to rate him as
"Average," since he was sick that day and decidedly
unimaginative in his thinking. If we were playing
Waterloo, we might even have to rate him as "Poor,"
since not only was he ill and uninspired for that whole
week, but his staff system wa barely functional. A sub-
commander who might merit the (V) bonus in one bat-
tle might not in another. Use your own judgment,
based on what you know of the battle you're recreating.
4.1 Rating the Commander
The army commander is rated for his own skills, which
include the efficiency of his staff. The commander's
Skill can be one of four ratings which express his intu-
ition and quickness of mind on the particular day of
battle we are depicting:
Great A rare, brilliant man at the peak of his
powers.
Good A sharp and highly competent general.
Average A competent but unremarkable per-
formance.
Poor A general who is having trouble con-
trolling his forces and staying on top of
events.
 Appendix I: Design-Your-own
The commander also has a Radius, which is depend-
ent upon the current weather conditions. The Radius is
equal to the current tum's Visibilty, and represents the
maximum distance the commander could actually see
and distinguish formations, and thus keep them under
his eye. This is not a reflection of his abilities or staff
work, since even the best commanders were limited by
weather and terrain conditions. If the current Visibility
is 20" then each army (and wing) commander's radius
is 20". Having the army headquarters on a Vantage
Point can affect the Radius.
4.2 Rating the Sub-Commanders
Each sub-commander is rated for certain characteris-
tics:
If he showed himself to be exceptionally inspira-
tional and brave in this battle, he gets the (V)alor
bonus.
If he showed himself to be unusually Aggre sive
or Cautious in this battle, he gets that personality dis-
tinction. (Otherwise, he is "normal" in this regard.)
If he and his staff were exceptionally skilled, then
his Radius Multiplier will be 1.5. Otherwise, most
sub-commanders have a radius multiplier of 1. This is
multiplied by the number of units in his Force, to
obtain his Radius.
Finally, his Control Number must be estab-
lished, which ranges from 1 (excellent) to 5 (very poor.)
This represents his utility and reliability as a subordi-
nate.
See A6.41 for a review of the rules regarding the
radii of sub-commanders, and the minimum and max-
imum radii permissible. A sub-commander's radius
might increase during the day of battle, if units of his
Force arrive as reinforcements, but his radius never
decreases during the day of battle, even ifhis units are
destroyed.
Remember that the imny commanders radius is based upon
a visual limit, which detennines the speed of his decisions
(his use of CPs.) But a sub-commanders radius is based on
how well he can manage the forces under his command.
5.0 Extended Example:
How to Convert an Historical Order of Battle
(O.B.) into Grande Armee units
On the right is a sample segment of an historical
order of battle. This shows a French infantry division
from the 1813 campaign in Spain. In Grande Armee it
is two units. Let's review how to create those units:
1St Division: General de division Abbe
1st Brigade: General de brigade Soulier
l/sth Legere Regiment (24/672)
2/5th Legere Regiment (17/645)
1/1St Line Regiment (28/942)
1/62nd Line Regiment (25/792)
2nd Brigade: General de brigade Baron Cassan
l/lOth Legere Regiment (16/569)
2/lOth Legere Regiment (14/551)
1/2/52nd Line Regiment (57/1545)
1/20th Dragoon Regiment (3/143/158)
Artillery: Capitaine Bessonne
8/6th Foot Artillery Regiment (3/60)
17/6th Foot Artillery Regiment (2/77)
5/5th Principal Train Battalion (1/71)
6/5th Principal Train Battalion (0/78)
Let's begin with Souliers I st Brigade. This is four battalions,
two Legere (total 1358 officers and men), and two Line
(total 1787 officers and men). That's a total strength of
3145 men, with the majority being Line infantry. Since we
don't have infonnation that these were exceptional units, we
will rate them the nonnal "Trained" morale class. 3145 ~
500 = 6.29. Souliers brigade will thus have 6SPs, and
given the presence of the light infantry, we will rate it as
SK2.
Now we do the same with Cassan's 2nd brigade. Here
we have an interesting situation: a two-battalion regiment of
legere (I 150 officers and men), two battalions of line
infantry (1602 officers and men), and a large squadron of
dragoons. We know the dragoons are in fact mounted
because the O.B. shows the number of men as well as hors-
es. So this is a Mixed Brigade; a rarity in the French anny.
The total strength is 2899 men, and we know that the 10th
Legere was an excellent unit, so let's designate this brigade as
"Veteran," meaning we divide the 2899 men by 400,
which gives us 7.24, or 7SPs.
Finally, this division includes two understrength compa-
nies of artillery and their train. We don't know how many
guns were actually present, but with only 137 artillerists in
both companies, combined, I think it would be safe to count
this as a single battery (2SPs), and thus add I SP to each of
our units for the attached divisional artillery.
Thus our units look like this:
1/1/1 Soulier Trained ,sp, SK2
1/1/2 Cas san Veteran SSP, SK2 MX
 Appendix II: Officers

There is no way to make a comprehensive catalog of every

Army Force Notes officer in the Napoleonic wars, from divisional command up.
Alvintzy Average 3/ 1 France alone had nearly 300 generaux de division in the
Bellegarde Poor 4/1 V period 1800181 S. The best we can hope for is to make a
Bianchi 3/1 list of outstanding officers you will frequently encounter in
Brady 5/ 1 your games. Adding to, subtracting from, and modifying this
Bubna 2/15 V, Aggressive list to suit your needs is perfectly fine.
(Archduke) Charles Good 2/15 V This appendix assigns game ratings to officers who
Chasteler 3/ 1 would command an army or a Force. If they did not com-
(GraO Colloredo 3/1 mand at one of these levels, no data will be present. In a few
Davidovich 3/ 1.5 cases, I have assigned "army" command ratings to good,
(Archduke) Ferdinand Poor 4/1 Cautious highranking officers, although they never actually com
Frimont Average 2/1 Cautiou manded a fully-independent army. Davout, BUlow, and Hill
Gyulai 3/ 1 Aggressive are examples. Surely these men would have been capable of
lIardegg 4/1 Cautiou independent army command, and this provides us with some
lie e-llomburg 2/1.5 interesting "What-Ifs." Feel free to add your own.
Hiller Average 4/1 Some officers might have a different rating on this chart
Hohenzollern 3/ 1 from the rating that appears in a particular scenario. Again,
Jellacic Average 3/ 1 Cautious remember that each game should rate the commanders for
(Archduke) John Poor 5/ 1 Cautious their performance on that day. These ratings are guidelines.
Keinmeyer 3/ 1 Scenario ratings always take precedence.
K1enau Average 3/ 1.5 Aggre sive
Kollowrath 3/ 1
Laudon Good 2/15
Lichtenstein Average 3/ 1 V, Aggressive Britain
(Archduke) Louis Poor 4/1
Mack Poor 4/1
Officer Army Force Notes
Abercromby Good V
Meerveldt 3/ 1.5 V
Melas Beresford Good 2/1.5 Cautious
Good 2/1.5
o titz 2/1.5 V, Aggre ive Chatham Poor
Radetzky 1/15 V Clinton Average 3/ 1
Ro enberg Poor Fraser Average
4/1
II ill Good 2/15
Schwarzenberg Average 3/ 1 Cautious
Poor Moore Great 1/15 V
Stoyevich 4/1
Vukassovich 3/1
Uxbridge 3/ 1.5 V, Aggressive
Wartensleben Average Wellington Great 1/1.5
4/1

E.xceptional Au man Divi ion General Exceptional Briti h Divi ion Generals
eipperg Cole
Hofer Cotton
ordmann Craufurd
Simonyi Hope
Wacquandt LeMarchant
Weissenwolf Lumley
Pack
Paget
Picton
 Appendix II: Officers _

France Officer Army Force

(Gouvion) St. Cyr Good 2/1.5
Officer Army Force Notes 5ebastiani Average 3/ 1
Arrighi de Casanova Average 3/1 Aggressive Souh am Average 2/1
Augereau Poor 3/1 V Soult Good 2/15
Bernadotte Poor 4/1 Cautious Suchet Good 1/15
Bertrand 2/1.5 V Vandamme Average 3/15 V, Aggressive
Bessieres Average 2/1 V Victor Poor 3/1 Cautious
Jerome Bonaparte Poor 4/1 Wathier 3/1
Joseph Bonaparte Poor
Napoleon Bonaparte Great Exce ptional Fr e nch Divis ion Ge nerals
Bourcier 3/ 1 Brennier
Brune Average 3/1 Delaborde
Caffarelli Average 3/ 1 Cautious Dorsenne
Clausel Average 2/15 V Dubreton
Davout Great 1/15 Duhesme
Drouet d'Erlon 3/ 1 V Eble
Drouot 2/15 V Foy
Dupont Average 3/1 Cautious Friant
Duroc 2/1 V Legrand
Eugene de Beauharnais Good 2/1.5 V, Cautious Marchand
Exelmans 3/ 1 Montbrun
Gazan Average 3/ 1 Morand
Gerard 2/1.5 V Pajol
Girard 3/1.5 V Rey
Grouchy Good 2/15 5enarmont
d'Hautpoul 2/1 St. Hilaire
(BargtJaY) d'HilIiers 3/ 1
Jourdan Poor 4/1 Cautious
Junot Average 2/15
Kellerman, Sr. Average
Kellerman, Jr. 2/15 V, Aggressive
Kleber Good 2/15 V
Lannes 1/15 V
Latour-Maubourg 1/1.5 V, Aggressive
Lauriston 2/15 Aggressive
Laval 3/ 1
Lefebvre Good 3/15 Cautious
Lefebvre- Desnoettes 2/1.5 V, Aggressive
Lobau (Mouton) 2/15 V
Loison 2/1.5 V
MacDonald Average 3/15
Marmont Good 2/15
Massena Great 1/1.5 V, Aggressive
Milhaud 2/1 V, Aggressive
Mortier 2/15 V, Aggressive
Murat Poor 4/ 1.5 V, Aggressive
Ney Poor 3/1 V, Aggressive
Oudinot Poor 3/15 V, Aggressive
Rapp Good 2/15 V, Aggressive
Mack surrenders at Ulm, 1805.
Reille Average 2/1
Reynier Average 3/1
(Carra) St. Cyr 3/1 Cautious
 Appendix II: Officers

Ottoman Empire Prussia

Officer Army Force Notes Officer Army Force Notes
'Abd ar-Rahman 1,5 Average 2/15 V, Aggre ive Bliicher Good 2/15 V, Aggressive
Ahmad Pasha Average 3/ 1 Biilow Good 2/1.5 V
Ahmet Jezzar 2/1 V, Aggressive Ferdinand (Bruns.wick) Poor 4/1
Alemdar Mustafa 2 Good 2/15 Cautiou Gnei enau Good Cautious
'Ali Tepelin 4 Good 5/ 1.5 Aggre ive Hohenlohe Poor 5/ 1
Baykradar Mustafa Poor 4/1 1<1 ist 2/15 V,Aggr ive
KethudaAli Average 3/1 Aggre ive L'estoq 2/1 Aggre ive
Hajji Mustafa Poor 2/15 (Prince) Louis 2/1 V,Aggre ive
Ilakki Mehmed Average 2/1.5 V,Aggre ive Pirch 3/ 1
Ibrahim Bey 6 Good 2/1 V, Aggre ive Ruchel Average 3/ 1 Cautious
Ibrahim Pasha Average 3/ 1 Tauentzien 3/ 1 Cautious
Ismail Poor 3/ 1 Aggre ive Thielemann 2/15
Khurshid Pasha Average 1/1 Aggressive Wartensleben Poor 4/1 Cautiou
Laz Ahmet Agha 3 Average 3/1.5 V,Aggre ive (Prince) Wilhelm 3/ 1
Murad Bey Poor 1/1 V,Aggre ive Yorck Average 4/ 1.5
Mustafa Rashid 1 2/1 V Ziethen 2/1 V
Pechlivan Khan Poor 3/1
Yu sef Zia Pasha 3 Poor 3/ 1 (Yorck was a strange case; a competent and effectiue corps
commander (hence his good radius), but a uery stubborn
The Ottoman Thrks lauished titles oj rank upon ciuilian subordinate who did not like taking orders (hence his high
administrators, much in the way that European nobility had Control Number.)
proliferated a Jorest oj Marquises, Viscomtes, Baronets,
Earls, etc. When you see a ~Pasha, n ~Bey, n "Agha," or "Qadi," Exceptional Pru ian Divi ion General
you are dealing with an Ottoman official oj land and title. Alven leben
Some superlatiues were traditional Muslim designations in Jurga s
Arabic, Thrkish, or Persian, such as ~llajji ' (one who has Kalkreuth
made the pi/grimmage to Mecca), or "Khan" (king). Since ROder
Muslim names were patronymic, these people haue no "last
names," in the European sense.

These men were part of the Nizami Jedid, and thus wouldn't be
in play after 1807.
2 The only man who could handle the Janissarics by 1807 -
commander of the Danube front for several years.
3 This man was a Grand Vizier (Prime Minister, essentially) of
the Empire.
4 (Ali Pasha of Janina). A fascinating man; the best Ottoman
commander of the era, but flagrantly disloyal to the govern-
ment.
5 Also known as the Qadi 'Abd-ar-Rahman. A "Qadi" was techni-
cally a judge. lie owed his command to court prestige, but the
judge turned out to be a decent general.
6 Bonaparte's wily opponent in the Levant campaign of 1798-<}9.

Exceptional Ottoman Divi ion Generals

MehmetAli
Veliuddin (Ali Pasha's son)

Platov, Russia's great Cossack commander,

 Appendix II: Officers 41
Russia Spain
Officer Army Force Notes Officer Army Force Notes
(Tsar) Alexander Poor V Albuquerque Poor 3/ 1 V
8aggavout 4/1 Cautious Areizaga Poor Cautious
Bagratian Average 2/1.5 V, Aggressive Ballastero Poor 4/1 Cautious
Barclay de Tolly Good 2/15 Blake Average Cautious
Bennigsen Poor 4/1 Castano Average 2/1 V
Buxhowden Poor 5/ 1 Aggressive Cuesta Poor
(Archduke) Constantine Poor 4/1 V del Parque Average 3/1.5
Oochturov Poor 4/1 d'Espana Poor
Essen 4/1 Freire Average 4/1
Eugene of Wiirttemberg 3/ 1 Cautiou Igle ias Poor 4/1 Cautious
Gallitzin 2/15 V O'Oonnell Poor 5/1 Cautious
Gorchakov 3/ 1 V Palafox Average 3/ 1 V
Kamen koi 3/1 Reding Average 3/1
Kapzewich 4/1 Romana Average 3/1.5
Karpov 3/1 V Santocildes Average 3/ 1 V
Korff 4/1 Venegas Poor 4/1 Cautious
Kutusov Average Zayas 2/15 V
Langeron Poor 4/1 V
Lieven 3/1
Mildoravitch 2/15 V, Aggressive E.~cepti onal S panis h Divis ion Ge n e r a ls
OIsufiev 3/ 1 Alvarez de Castro
Ostermann-Tol toy 4/1 Cautious llerresi
(Graf) Pahlen 4/1 V Longa
Platov (commands Cossacks only) 1/1.5 V, Aggressive Porlier
Prozorovi ki Average 3/ 1 Cautiou Saint-Marq
Przschibitzhevsky Poor 5/1
Rayevski 3/1.5 V
Sacken Average 3/1 It's bard to judge Blake. Should we rate a general poorly
St. Priest 3/ 1 becau e he rarely wanted to fight , and generally avoided bat-
Sievers 2/15 V, Aggressive ties whenever he could? Or should we rate him highly
Suvarov Good becau e he had the good sense to realize when there was no
Tormassov Poor 4/1 possible hope of winning with the forces he had, and there-
Tchichigov Poor 4/1 Cautious fore didn't waste the lives of his men?
Tuchkov 4/1
Uvarov 3/ 1 V
Vorontzov 3/1
Winzingerode Poor 4/1 Cautious
Wittgenstein Average 3/15 Cautious
Yermalov 2/1 V

Exce ptional Russian Divi ion Ge neral

Borozdin
Oiebitch
Paskevich
Tartov
Vasiltchikov
 Appendix II: Officers

Officers of the Minor States Poles

Most of the time, when designing scenarios, you will Officer Army Force Not
find that the armies of minor states are led by generals Dombrowski 1/1.5 V
and marshals from their "master" state. At the corps Poniatowski Good 2/1.5 V, Aggressive
level, for instance, the Saxons were often led by the
French General Reynier, the Westphalians by Junot or (Note that these two men despise each other, and wont
Jerome, the Italians by Eugene, the Portuguese by serve together!)
Bere ford, and so on. So the list of minor state gener-
als here will seem very incomplete. There are no offi- Exceptional Poli h Division Gen erals
cers at all listed for many imprtant states because they Kiaziewicz
never had their own corp commanders, and they had Sokolnicki
no exceptional division generals. In some cases, such Zayonchek
as Denmark, there are no listings becau e of a lack of
information about senior commanders. There were so
few instances of large Danish forces in combat during Saxony
the Napoleonic wars that it is impossible to determine
if they had any noteworthy officers or not. Feel free to Exceptional Saxon Divi ion Generals
make up your own ratings (most games do that, any- Zeschwitz
way.)

Bavaria Sweden
Officer Army Force Note Officer Arm y Force Notes
Crown Prince Ludwig 3/ 1 Adlercreutz Good 2/1.5 Aggre ive
Raglovich 4/ 1 Cautious Bemadotte (as Prince) Poor
Wrede Average 4/ 1 V K1ercker Average 3/1 Cautious
K1ingspor Average 3/ 1 Cautious
Exceptional Bavarian Divi ion General Stedingk 3/ 1 Cautious
DeRoy
Exceptional Swedish Division General
von Dobeln
Dutch-Belgians
Officer Army Force Note
Prince of Orange Average 2/1 Wurttem b erg
Exceptional Dutch-Belgian Division General Officer Army Force Not
Chas e Crown Prince Poor 3/ 1
Perponcher

Italians
Officer Army Force Notes
Fontanelli 3/ 1 V
Lecchi 3/1 V
Omano 2/1 V, Aggressive
 Appendix III: Unit Ratings

A ustria Notes on CavaJry Type

The tenns "light" and "heavy" originated with a conception
Infantry Morale K
of size and weight but they are not very specific with regard
Grenadiers, pre-1809 Elite 0
to function. Heavy cavalry were supposed to be used for bat-
Grenadiers, 1809+ Elite
tlefield action only. They were to be preserved for the big,
Jiigers, pre-1809 Veteran 1
battle-winning charges. Light cavalry, on the other hand,
Jiigers, 1809+ Veterans 2
found most of its employment off the battlefield, in scout-
Line Infantry Trained 1
ing, screening, skirmishing, and pursuit. Their weaponry also
Grenzers varies 2
differed, with light cavalry more likely to carry firearms and
Landwehr Conscripts 0
a curved "slashing" sword, rather than a heavier, straight
(Grenz morale could vary from Raw to Veteran.) "thrusting" sword.
These differences aside, light cavalry were nonetheless
Cavalry Morale CavType thrown into battlefield charges, and thus had to do every-
Hussars Elite Light thing. Heavy cavalry, however, were rarely used for the
Cheveaulegers Veterans Light "light" cavalry duties. In Grande Ann~e, if cavalry is desig-
Uhlans Trained Light nated "light," that means that it can perform all the screen-
Dragoons Veterans Light ing, and pursuit-related tasks, as well as charge on the bat-
Kuirassiers Elite Ileavy tlefield. If cavalry is listed as "heavy," then it is used only for
Landwehr & Insurrection Cavalry Raw Light battlefield shock. (Dragoons, who had evolved from mount-
ed infantry, tended to fit neither of these descriptions pre-
Artillery: cisely, but since they rode smaller horses than true "heav-
Before 1809, the heavy "Po ition" batteries consisted of 12- ies," and since they often moved in open order, I usually
pdrs, and the light "Po ition" batteries used 6-pdrs. These classify them as "light.")
might both be used as reserve artillery, since the "Brigade"
batteries, con isting of either 6-pdrs or 3-pdrs, were mo t
likely attached to infantry units (who also had their own bat- Britain and British A llies
talion guns.)
There were no true "horse batteries, since the gunners
rode the cai on, rather than riding horses. But since a "true" I n fantry Morale SK
horse battery could only go as fast a a caisson anyway, thi Foot Guards Guard 2
didn't really make the Austrians any slower than anybody Light Infantry & runes Veteran or Elite 2
el e, and probably saved horses. These so-called "cavalry bat- IIighlanders Veteran or Elite 2
teries" had either 3-pdrs or 6-pdrs. Fusili r , KGL, & other Line Veteran 2
After 1809, the Au trians began pha ing out 3-pdr gun
altogether, and got rid of the battalion guns. Reserve batter- Hanoverian Infantry, ]815 Con cript 0
ies were uniformly 12-pdrs, and all else were 6-pdrs. Hanoverian Landwehr, 1815 Raw 0

a sau Infantry Trained

Brun wick Light & other elites Veteran 2

Brunswick Line Trained

Caval ry Morale CavType

Light Dragoons Veteran Light
Heavy Dragoons Elite Heavy
Hu ars Elite Light
Guards Guard Heavy

Brunswick Light Cavalry Veteran Light

Artillery:
Briti hand KGL foot batteries could field 6-pdr or 9-pdr
guns, depending on whether they were "light" or "heavy." The
9-pdrs were, of course, rarer, though they were excellent
guns; nearly as powerful as a French 12-pdr. Horse batteries
nearly alway used 6-pdrs, although occasionally might be
found with 9-pdrs. The British-trained Portuguese artillery
also u ed 6-pdrs almost exclusively, as did Dutch-Belgian,
Brunswick, and Hanoverian artillery companies.
 e Appendix Ill: Unit Ratings

France The Ottoman Empire

Infantry Morale SK Infantry Morale SK
Old Guard Grenadiers, Chasseurs Guard 2 Jani aries Trained or Conscript 2
Old Guard Marines Guard 2 Bostancis, Guard Janis aries Elite 2
Young Guard, 1808-12, and 1815 Elite 2 Nizami Jedid Veteran or Trained 2
Young Guard, 1813-14 2 Sekhans Conscript 2
Ugere infantry 1805-07 Elite 2 Marines (after 1803) Veteran 2
1808-12, and 1815 Veteran 2 Rayas Conscript 2
1813-14 Trained 2 Militias: Derbents, Fellahin, etc. Raw 2
Ligne infantry 1805-07 Veteran 2
1808-12, and 1815 Trained 2 Cavalry Morale CavType
1813-14 Conscripts 1 Suvarileri Trained lleavy
Swis regiments Elite 2 Guard Suvarileri Veteran Heavy
Marines (Regiments 1-5) Veteran Sipahis of the Porte Trained Light
Other Marines Con cripts Other Sipahi Con cript Light
Feudal Cavalry Raw Light
Cavalry Morale CavTyp Mameluks of Egypt Elite Heavy
Guard Grenadiers, Gendarmes Guard Heavy
Gd. Chas eurs, Lancers, Dragoons Guard Light Artillery:
Young Guard Cavalry Trained varies The Ottomans had been using artillery for centuries, but they
Gardes d'ilonneur Trained varies regarded it as primarily a siege weapon. In the 1790 some
Cuira iers, Carabiniers Elite Heavy reform and re tructuring of the field artillery began, ome-
Dragoons, 1805-12, and 1815 Trained Light times with French advisors. The Ottoman batterie were
Dragoons, 1813-14 Light "foot"-only for many years. Even after a regiment of Horse
Bu ars, 1805-12, and 1815 Elite Light artillery was rai ed in 1808, Turkish guns were too heavy to
Bu ars, 1813-14 Veteran Light really take advantage of the extra mobility. Therefore, all
Lancers, 1805-12 and 1815 Veteran Light Ottoman batteries are "Foot" for this game.
Lancers, 1813-14 Trained Light The Ottomans did not use the pounder" sy tern of most
Chasseurs, 1805-12, and 1815 Trained Light European nations, but rather measured the diameter of the
Chasseurs, 1813-14 Light barrel. The main field gun fired a hot a little lighter than a
French 8-pdr, so we will call it an "S-pdr" for game purposes.
The Young Guard regiments in 1813-14 varied wildly in There was a heavier cannon which fired a 14-pound shot, but
quality. Some were good unit, culled from the best recruit no records sub tantiate its use in full batteries. To confuse
and given experienced officers from Spain. Others were com- matters further, there was a light gun which did indeed meas-
pletely green. The later Voltigeur and Tirailleur regiments ure the weight of its projectile, which was just under 4
had as little a ten days' basic training, and were described by pounds, so for this game we will call it a "4-pdr."
Caffarelli (one of Napoleon's ADCs) as "the weake t and most
sickly" con cripts he had ever een. Apparently they hadn't
even completed battalion-level training, much less brigade or
divi ional maneuvers .
The dragoons and cha seurs in (or returning from) Spain
would by this point be Veteran . The new regiments raised in
1813 would be Conscripts or Trained.

Artillery:
Corps reserve artillery units will almo t always be 12-pdr foot
batteries, although some 8-pdrs (the "medium" artillery of
the early Empire, used for divisional batteries) served as
corp reserve batteries in Spain.
Horse batteries in the early war period were usually 4-
pdrs, with orne captured Austrian 3-pdrs mixed in. By 1810
most horse batteries had standardized with 6-pdr batteries,
although the lighter guns remained in ervice in Spain.
 Appendix III: Unit Ratings e
Forgotten Army I: The Ottoman Turks Prussia
The uTerrible Turk" was past his plime when a young General
Bonaparte landed In Egypt in 1798. As the 18th century closed, the
Infan try, pre-1812 Morale SK
empire surrered an elghteenyear period or terrible weather and crop
Guard Elite o
railures. This heightened tensions as the state was wracked with Inter
Grenadiers Elite o
J agers Elite
nal connlct and reeional revolts. The essentially reudal nature or the
Fu iliers Trained
empire's regions Invited this problem, and lert the government In
Mu keteers Trained
Istanbul weak and poor. By the Napoleonic era, the new 28year-old
Sultan, Sellm III, was committed to rerorm.
When brigaded, Musketeers were usually given several
There are many myths about the Ottomans In this peliod. For
companies of rifle-armed schiitzen (literally: "marksmen") as -
example, many people think that the Turks rought as a "horde," and
skirmishers. Depending upon the number of them present,
that Selim was trying to Instill Europeanstyle training In order to
improve the firepower and discipline or his troops. In ract, the
SK could be either 0 or 1.
Turkish method or war was completely dirrerent rrom that or the
Europeans (which makes it very hard to assign game morale-ratings.)
Infantry, 1812+ Morale SK
Guards Guard 2
Where the Europeans prized lock-step discipline and order, the Turks
Grenadiers Elite
prererred soldiers to act as individuals. The Turks retained their older
Jagers Veteran 2
slower-filing muskets not because the empire was decrepit and back:
First 12 Line Regiments Veteran 2
wards, but because these weapons were more accurate, and Ottoman
Reserve Regiments Trained
soldiers always aimed their shots Individually, rather than filing in
Landwehr Regiments varies lor 0
unalmed volleys, like Europeans. The Turks did not use bayonets
because they believed that they discouraged a man rrom learning to
Some Landwehr regiments were quite good. The Silesian
fight as an Individual with a proper handto-hand weapon like a sword
landwehr, and those units which by late 1813 had become
or an axe. Small wonder they were excellent skirmishers.
experienced, would be rated - [rained." The other Landwehr
Why then did Selim raise the Nizaml Jedld, his uNew Army,"
of the 1813-14 period, and much of the 1815 Landwehr would
even when he had to levy an unpopular new sales tax to pay ror It?
be "Conscripts." The hastily-raised home militia units, and
He wanted a rorce directly answerable to him, and the Janlssalies no
the 1815 Landwehr from Saxony or the Rhineland areas (such
longer fit the bill. By this point In their long history, the Janlssalies
as Westphalia) would be "Raw." If a Landwehr unit has any
were no lon&er an elite, and no longer very obedient to the monarch.
Jagers attached, give it a SKI rating. If not, then SKo.
Each Janissary reefment had evolved Its own traditions, Its own
recruitment system, and Its own sense or how and when to make war.
Cavalry, pre-1812 Morale CavType
Sellm wanted an army he could use twelve months out or the year.
Uhlans ("Towarczys") Veteran Light
(Another popular myth Is the notion that the Nlzaml Jedld perished
Cuirassiers Elite Heavy
when Sellm was assassinated In 1807; In ract most or It was sarely out
Guard Cavalry Guard Heavy
or the capital, In the field armies, and continued service through the
next two Sultanates.) The Nlzaml Jedld was uEuropean style" In the
Cavalry, 1812+ Morale CavType
sense that It was recruited by conscription and directly served the
Landwehr Cavalry Con cripts Light
central iOvernment (and had taken some dlill elements trom the
Uhlans Veterans Light
Russian system), but It was still undeniably an Ottoman rorce.
Dragoons Trained Light
War&ame traditions would have you field an Ottoman army as
Hussars Elite Light
a hu&e body or cavalry, a horde or irregular Inrantry, and a small core
Cuirassiers Elite Heavy
or uregulars." This, too, Is mostly fiction and misunderstanding. The
Ottoman cavalry was In Sleep decline by this time, and Ottoman
armies were mostly on root. The regular cavalry "Slpahls" rarely lOOk
In 1813-15 there was at least one Guard unit oj each oj the
the field with more than 3,000 men, and like the Irregular horsemen
above cavalry types, except Landwehr cavalry. For Guard
who supplemented them, their Job was mainly reconnaissance.
units oj that type, increase the morale by one level; Guard
Ottoman cavalry was not really up to the task or charefn& European
Uhlans would become Elite, Jor example. Consider the
inrantry. Selim made a &reat error! to Increase the sIze and errective-
"Garde du Corps" to be Guard Cuirassiers.
ness or the Suvalileli heavy cavalry, and although It theoretically
Artillery:
numbered nearly 30,000 men, It never fielded more than 10,000.
Prussian heavy ("reserve") batteries consi ted of 12-pdrs,
Only In Mameluke Egypt was there a great host or battie-cavalry.
while the "line" batteries and horse batteries used 6-pdrs.
For all this, the Turks could still be rormldable. They were orten
After 1807 the Prussian artillery was always desperately
reckless and brave, &ood at sle&ecrart, and &enerally adept at dlg&in&-
under-equipped, and used whatever it could get, but they
In. They lost more orten than they won against the Russians and
were the only nation to mass howitzers into concentrated bat-
Austrians, but we orten ror&et that by this time the Ottomans were
teries, in addition to a igning a section of howitzers to each
broke, were fighting two powerful European empires and racing Asian
"normal" battery, the way most nations did. See M3.0 for the
enemies trom Persia to North Arrlca, as well. In 1812 the Turks
made peace with Russia, light as Napoleon crossed the Nlemen.
rules for Prussian howitzer batteries. At least two massed
howitzer batteries are known to have seen action.
 e Appendix III: Unit Ratings

Russia Sweden
Infantry Morale SK Infantry Morale SK
Foot Guards Elite
Guard Grenadiers (pre-1812) Elite 0
Grenadiers Veteran
Guard Jagers (pre-1812) Elite
Jligers Trained
Guard units (1812+) Guard 1
Other infantry regiments Trained or Con cript
Grenadiers Elite 0
Fu i1iers (pre-1812) Veteran 0
Musketeers (pre-1812) Trained 0
Cavalry Morale CavType
Line infantry (1812+) Veteran or Trained 1
Life Guards Elite lIeavy
Jagers (pre-1812) Veteran 0
Cuira iers, Carabiniers Veteran lleavy
Jagers (1812+) Veteran
lIu ars Trained Light
Opolochenie Raw
Dragoon , Mounted Jager Conscript Light
Cavalry Morale CavType
Dragoons Veteran Light
Uhlans Veteran Light Forgotten Anny II: The Swedes
Hu ars Elite Light A century before Napoleon, the Swedes were one of the major pow
Chasseurs (from 1813+) Veteran Light ers - If not che malor power - of northern Europe. Defeat aeainst
Cuira iers Elite Heavy RussIa was followed by a century of atrophy In political and military
Guard Cuirassiers, Horse Guards Guard Heavy spheres. A Finnish revolt In 1788 led to another RussIan war, In
Guard Uhlans, lIus ars, Dragoon Guard Light whIch the Swedish military and government were singing different
Cossacks Raw Light (SK2) runes. Distrust erew and morale arnong the officers fell. There were
open conspiracies and talk of revolt by the eenerals. 8y the time of
Artillery: the French revolution, Sweden was clinging to a few Baltic harbors
Throughout this period the Russian artillery retained the 12 like Stettln and Stralsund, and trying to avoid tangiing with the big
gun (4 of which were their unique "unicorn" howitzers) powers. In 1808, however, another war with Russia began, and
organization. Guard batteries might be smaller, with propor- Sweden lost all of Finland. By this time the Swedish royal family had
tionately more howitzers. Ilorse batteries consisted of 6-pdrs. run out of sane male heirs and Sweden's nobility and eenerals were
Foot batteries were designated "light" (6-pdrs), or "heavy" scouting for a crown prince. They selected Marshal 8ernadone,
(12-pdrs.) Napoleon's old friend who had become persona non gnu in the
Grande Amree. GIven the inability of the king, 8ernadone as Crown
Prince became the effective ruler of the country by 18 10.
8ernadotte has not fared well with historians. He was a rather
Spain lacy commander and a fairly unpleasant and seifaggrandizing person,
even by the standards of the French Marshalate. Nonetheless, from
Infantry Moral e SK the moment he took the throne, he was bent on improving Sweden's
Guards Veteran 1 place in the world. He buried the hatchet with Russia, cut a deal with
Grenadiers Veteran o the British, and prepared to loin the allies. His real aim was to attack
Light infantry Conscript 1 Napoleon's ally, Denmark, and thus reeain for Sweden the dominant
Line regiments Raw or Con cript 1 roie in Scandinavia.
Foreign regiments Trained o There Is no aereement on the quality of the Swedish anny duro
British-trained line, 1812+ Trained ing the NapoleoniC wars. Bernadone kept them out of action most of
Militia units Raw the time, using instead the Prussians and Russi ns under his command
in the allied "Anny of the North." this might have meant that the
Cavalry Morale CavType Swedes were unreliable troops, or it might have meant that he was
Guard Cavalry Veteran Light simply being careful with their lives. Swedish cavalry, apparently, was
lIu ars, Lancers, Dragoons Conscripts Light in poor shape, Sweden having few good horses. A British liaison offi
Militia Cavalry Raw Light cer In 1813 commented that the Swedish Guards looked solid
enough, but that the line infantry was poorly equipped and "neither
Artillery: the old troops nor new levies were steady under anns." Swedish
There was really no Spanish artillery "corps." Lacking a cen- artillery was antiquated and heavy: uthe carriages and everything
tral administration during the war (due, among other things, relating to equipment were very far behind those of the present day,
to French occupation of 7596 of the country), there could be and those in other annies. "
no standardization. Batteries varied widely in size and com- After the victory at Leipzig, in which the Swedes played a very
position. Later, British-trained and equipped units would minor part, 8ernadotte tumed his anendon to northern Europe, con-
have British-made 6-pdrs. Shortages of horses meant that quering Norway and solidifying his dynasty, which stili holds the
Spanish guns were often pulled into battle by mules, oxen, or Swedish throne to this day.
cattle. Good luck!
 Appendix III: Unit Ratings e
The Minor States Denmark

This section tries to give a general - certainly not com- Infantry Morale
prehensive - index of the infantry and cavalry types Guards Elite
Leib regiments,
fielded in large numbers by the minor states in the
light troop and other "elites n Veteran
Napoleonic Wars. You might not see your favorite unit Line infantry, pre-1813 Trained
in this list (Hey! Where's the Westphalian Guard Jager Line infantry, 1813+ Con cript
Dragoon Rifle Tirailleur-Voltigeur Grenadier
Company?!) When creating your own scenarios, just
use common sense and keep the big picture in mind. Cavalry Morale Ca v Type
For artillery of the minor states, pay attention to the Light Dragoons and Dragoon Conscript Light
size of the guns, and whether they were foot or horse. lIu ars Veteran Light
Heavy cavalry Trained Ileavy

The Small German States and the

Confederation of the Rhine (Kingdom of) Holland
Infantry Morale SK and Dutch-Belgian Forces
Baden infantry, to 1807 Trained 1
Baden infantry, after 1808 Veteran or Elite 2
Cleves-Berg infantry Veteran Infantry Morale SK
Confederation regts. '4-7 Conscript 1
Guard units (not Imperial Guard) Elite
l ie ian Guard or Leib regiments Elite 2
Light infantry regiments Trained
Other Ilessian regiments Veteran Line infantry Conscript
assau infantry Trained
Wiirzburg infantry Trained Dutch-Belgian Line, 1815 Conscript o
Dutch-Belgian Light, 1815 Con cript 1
Dutch-Belgian Militia, 1815 Raw o
Cavalry Morale Cav Type
Baden lIu sars and Dragoons Elite Light
Cleve - Berg Chev-legers, Lancer Elite Light Cavalry Morale Cav Type
lie ian Chevaux-Iegers Elite Light Dutch caualry was absorbed into uFrench n regiments.
assau Chevaux-Iegers Veteran Light
Wiirzburg Dragoons Veteran Light Dutch-Belgian
or lIanoverian Light Cavalry Con cripts Light
Dutch-Belgian Carabiniers Trained Heavy
Bavaria
Infantry Morale SK Naples
Guard Grenadiers Elite 2
Light infantry to 1812 Veteran 2
Line infantry to 1812 Trained Infantry Morale SK
All non-Guard infantry after 1812 Conscript Guard regiments and "Velite n Veteran
Legere regiments Conscript
Line regiments Raw or Conscript o
Cavalry Morale Ca Type
All cavalry Veteran Light Although organized and theoretically trained to skirmish,
one wouldn't dare allow Neapolitan soldiers to get thatfar
out of sight of their officers and expect them ever to come
back!

Cavalry Morale CavType

Gd. Velites and Guards of Iionor Elite Light
Lancers Trained Light
Chasseurs Conscript Light
 e Appendix III: Unit Ratings

Northern Italy Grand Duchy of Warsaw and Other

Polish Troops
I n fan try Morale SK
Guard regiments Elite 2 Infantry Morale SK
Guard 'Conscripts' and Marines Veteran 2 Line infantry, 1808+ Veteran 2
Leggera, pre-1813 Veteran 2 (Early recruits, 1807) Con cript 1
Line regiments, pre-1813 Veteran 2 Vistula Legion Elite 2
Leggera, 1813-14 Trained 2 Other Polish units
Line regiments, 1813-14 Trained or Conscript in French or Italian ervice Veteran 2

Cavalry Morale Cav Type

Ca val ry Morale Cav Type Uhlans (lancers) Veteran or Elite Light
Guard cavalry regiments Elite or Guard Heavy Vistula Legion Uhlans Elite Light
Dragoons Elite Light Hu ars, Chasseurs Veteran Light
Chasseurs, pre-1813 Veteran Light Cuira iers Elite Ileavy
Chasseur , 1813-14 Trained Light

Portugal Westphalia
Infantry Morale SK Infantry Morale SK
All regiments before 1808 Con cript 0 Guard Grenadiers Elite 1
Line battalions, 1808-11 Trained Guard light infantry Veteran 2
Line battalions, 1812+ Veteran 1 All other line infantry Con cript
Cazadores, 1808-11 Trained 2 Other light infantry Trained 2
Cazadores, 1812+ Veteran 2
Ordenanza (Militia) Raw 2 Cavalry Morale Cav Type
Hussars, pre-1812 Con cript Light
Cavalry Morale Cav Type Cheveaux-Iegers, pre-1813 Trained Light
All Cavalry Trained Light Hussars and Chevauxlegers, 1812+ Trained Light
Heavy cavalry, pre-1813 Elite Heavy
Heavy cavalry, 1813+ Veteran Heavy

Saxony
Note that these ratings cover the pre-1807 Saxons allied to
Prussia, the 1808-13 Saxons allied to France, and then the
1813-14 Saxon "legions" which joined the allied war effort Wiirttemberg
after Leipzig. For the 1815 Saxons and Saxon duchies
absorbed into the Prussian service altogether, see the section Infantry Morale SK
on Prussia. Leib Guard Elite 2
Light infantry and Jagers Elite 2
Infantry Morale SK Line regiments, through 1813 Veteran
Guard Grenadiers Veteran Infantry in allied service, 1813-14 Trained
Light infantry Trained
Line regiments, pre-1808 Trained
Line regiments, 1808-13 Conscript Cavalry Morale CavType
Infantry in allied service, 1813-14 Conscript All cavalry, through 1812 Veteran Light
All cavalry, 1813+ Trained Light

Cavalry Morale CavType

Hussars and Chevaux-Ieger Elite Light
Cuira iers Elite Heavy
Guard cavalry Elite Heavy
 Eclaireur: Grande Armee ata Glance CIt
B1.0 The Sequence of Play
I. Pre-game prep a ration Thing to do with CPs:
A. Detennine ratings for officers and units.
B. Detennine weather conditions and effects. G3.0 Give a command to a
C. Detennine basic length of the game. sub-commander
ll. Ea ch Turn:
A. Weather Variation (skip this on the first turn)
D4.0 Modify the initiative
B. Command Phase roll
1. Any lightly wounded officers might return to their duties
2 . Both players roll for command points (CPs)
H16.1 Move the commander's
3. Roll to detennine initiative for the first pulse base
c. Pulses:
1. Simultaneous skirmishing
G5.31 Create a detachment,
2. Simultaneous artillery fire
deploy a general or
3. First Side Phasing ADC
a) Control Segment: Issue commands and/ or take control tests
b) Movement Segment: Move units M6.o Move an engineer
c) Combat Segment: Resolve combats stand
4. Second Side Phasing: repeat segments a-b-c, as above.
5. Remove suppre ion from artillery units L3.1 Modify an army
6. Roll to determine initiative for next pul e, and return to C. Or, if morale roll
the tum ends, go to D.
D. Simultaneous Rally Segment: K6.o Modify the rally factor
1. Attempt to recover lost SPs
of a unit within range
2. Attempt to rally broken units
of the commander
lli. Anothe r Turn ?
A. Check army morale, if needed.
B. ...or, if the day of battle ends, proceed to Victory Assessment.

Weather Basic Maximum

Condition Length # Visibility Modifie r to
Visibility:
Sunny 4 24"
Normal 3 20" +6" on a Vantage Point
Overcast 2 16" -6" in Fog
Precipitating 1 12"

The Command Table

Die Roll
Napoleonic Army 1 2 3 4 5 6
Traditional Army 1 2 3 4 5 6
Great 40 45 50 55 6.0 65 70
Good 30 35 40 45 50 55 6.0
Average 30 30 35 35 40 45 50
Poor 30 30 30 35 35 40 45
_ Eclaireur: Grande Armee at a Glance
E. Skirmishing (simultaneously)
Who can SK-attack? Russian Cos acks and any
infantry unit with an SK higher than zero. Nobody, if
it's raining or snowing.
Range? Off the frontal perspective, 4" ifSK1; 6" if
SK2.
Targets? Any infantry or artillery unit, unless enemy
cavalry is within 2" of either attacker or target.
To Resolve:
Each side rolls one die, plus SK value. Defender gets +1
for MX brigade, +2 in a town. If the target's roll is
greater or equal, then the attacker fails. If the attack-
er's roll is greater, then:
If the target is artillery: the attacker's roll must be
at least double the target's. If so, the target is sup-
pres ed.
If the target is infantry: the attacker's roll mu t be
greater than the target's. Target loses ISP.
F. Artillery Fire (simultaneously)
Roll one die per SP of artillery firing.
Targets? Designate the enemy target, then all guns
mu t fire at once on that target. Then choose another
target.
Bonu die: if target is Vulnerable (F6.o)
French Old Guard may add one to rolls.
Saving Throws Against Artillery Fire:
2 oft Cover
4 Hard Cover
2 Target is artillery or engineer
1 Different elevation
3 Ground is Mud
2 Ground is Soft
"Final Shot": Against an attacker to the front:
Hits infantry on 4-6 and cavalry on 5-6. No saving
throw , no modifiers.

F6.o The Artillery Chart

Gun Size To Hit # / Range
Heavy (9-12 lbs) 2-6 6" 4-6 10" 5-6 16"
Medium (6-8 lbs) 3-6 4" 5-6 12"
Light (3-4 lbs) 3-6 3" 6 9"

The Control Segment (see page 22) G4.21 Force Status

Roll Status
A sub-commander who does not receive a command must s6 Inactive Modifier
take a Control Te t. Ifhe passes, his Force is under +3 Aggressive
7-9 Adjust
control. If he fails, then determine whether or not he can -1 Visible enemies only
see the enemy. If No, then his Force is Inactive this 10+ Attack!
cav & arty.
pulse. If Yes, then roll two dice to determine his Force -2 Cautious
Status. (see table on the right.)

Slow Inbntry: Austria, Prussia before ISII, Russia, Spain, Portugal before IS09, German minor states before IS09.
Fm Inbntty: France, Britain (and British minor allies), Ottomans, Prussia after lSI I, and all others not yet mentioned.

H2.0: Movement Allowances H31: The Terrain Table

Type Base Move Plus Cost of
Foot Artillery and Fast Infantry 6 1 die Type Rough Obstacle
Slow Infantry 4 1 die Infantry 2-3 1-2
Light Cavalry 10 1 die Cavalry 3-4 2-3
Hor e Artillery and Heavy Cavalry 8 1 die Artillery 3-4 3-4
Officers (3CPs to move the commander) 18 - Officers 1-2 1-2
 Eclaireur: Grande Armee at a Glance CD
H6.5 Changing Direction
H12.2 How Units React When Attacked
Wheeling:
Any unit may do 0 as a function of movement Infantry does not react, other than to turn to face the
attacker.
Ch a nge Fa ce: Artillery will take a Final Shot (F7.0) if the enemy
Artillery or Cavalry: once, free, at the beginning of a pulse. attacked its front. Then if it is not attached, it will try to
Infantry: once, at beginning of pulse, for fou r movement E scape (HI2.31). If attached, it will fight as part of the
points in clear terrain, or all movement points in rough infantry to which it is attached.
terrain or in mud. Cavalry may Evade (H12.23) attacking infantry, if it
wishes.
Retro/Flank Move: Cavalry may attempt to evade attacking cavalry. (HI2.2I)
Artillery: flank move or retrograde is free
Infantry and Cavalry: double co t to move.

Oblique:
Up to 45 degrees, forward only, free. Infantry may move to
H12.3 1: Artillery Escape
contact.
Attacker
Defender Infantry Hvy Cav. LtCav.
Ft. Artillery 3 2
HI2.23 Cavalry Evades Hs. Artillery 2
4 3
Each side rolls one die, with defender's roll modified: Modifiers to Die Roll:
-1 if defender is heavy and attacker is light. +1 in Mud, Snow, or Rain
+1 if defender i light cavalry and attacker is heavy. +1 Artillery in rough terrain
+ 2 if defender is Cossack, against any attacker -1 Artillery behind an obstacle ( uch as a wall or ditch)
(It is possible, with enough modifiers in certain circum-
If the Attacker's roll is greater, then the defending cavalry
stances, to be unable to escape.)
loses ISP, and a combat will be fought here.
If the Defender's roll i less than or equal to the attack-
er's, then the defending cavalry Evades: roll for its move-
ment allowance, as normal, and then moves half that num- HI7.1 Units Outside the Radius of
ber of inches as directly away from the attacker as possible. their Sub-Commander
* May not Skirmish attack
* May not fire (if artillery), except "Final Shot"
H14.0 The 6" Rule * Lo e one pip on combat dice
* May not recover lost SPs
Once within 6" of the enemy, a unit may only * Mu t attempt to move back in.
move directly towards or away from the clo est
enemy unit.
If starting a move within 6" and rolling for move-
ment, a roll of "1" means that the unit will not J5.0 Officer Casualty
close with the enemy. A roll of "6" means that it * Within 1" of a unit that was successfully SK-
must try to attack the nearest enemy to its front. attacked.
* When he used his (V) to influence a combat.
* When an enemy unit moves through him.
* When within 1" of a unit that Breaks.
G6.o "Attached" Officers
Roll two dice. A normal officer has fallen on a roll of
(An officer may do one of each of these per pulse)
11+ (an officer with the (V)alor bonus falls on a roll
of 10+.) If the officer has fallen, roll another d6:
* Re-roll a movement die for a unit within 3"
* Re-roll a terrain table die for a unit within 3" 1-2 Lightly Wounded
* If he has a (V)alor bonus, he may give a Bonus 3-4 Badly Wounded
die to one friendly unit in combat. (This exposes 5-6 Killed in Action
him to an officer casualty check (J5.0)).
 _ Eclaireur: Grande Armee at a Glance
14.0 Procedure for Combat
" Square up attacker's base.
" No more than one attacker per defender's base side. No more 14.4 Saving Throws in Combat
than two attackers, total.
1 Infantry or artillery on higher elevation
" Bonus die for a MX brigade (14.2), or for a (V) officer.
2 Cavalry saving vs. infantry in the rain
" Both sides roll dice, trying to score Hits.
2 Heavy cavalry saving vs. hits scored by
" Infantry and cavalry normally hit on 4-6. Artillery hit only on 6.
light cavalry
Subtract one pip from each die for:
2 Protected by Soft Cover.
-1 Vulnerable
4 Protected by Hard Cover.
-1 Flanked
-1 vs. Combined Arms
-1 Outside radius of sub-commander Save Number i never greater than 5.
-1 Infantry attacking cavalry

Regardless of multiple modifiers, ixes are always hits.

14.6 Resolve Combat K2.0 The Rally Factor

" Side which scored most hits wins; defender wins ties. But a side
which broke always loses. .. one die plu
pecial rules apply to infantry defending in Squares (14.621)
" A victorious defender holds the ground. The attacker Falls Back (or 6 Guard
routs). Elite
5
" A victorious attacker takes the defender's ground, while the defend- Veteran
er Falls Back (or routs). 4
3 Trained
The Fall-Back distance is 3" plus the difference in SP los. (J1.0) 2 Con cript
1 Raw

-2 for each circled "R" marked on

the unit's roster, showing a previ-
1.:3.0 Army Morale ous rally.
The army morale check roll is: +? for CPs pent by the army com-
mander for this unit's rally factor
2 Dice
+ Turn Number
+ Units lost beyond Break Point
- CP committed (L3.1) Ks.o SP Recovery Table
If the result of this roll totals 14 or les , the
army bas pa ed its morale check. Proceed to
the next turn, if there is one. If the result was 15 or None 0-6 0-4 0-3 0-2 0-1
more, the army's morale ba collapsed.
One 7+ 5-7 4-6 3-5 2-4
Two 8+ 7-8 6-7 5-6
Three 9+ 8-9 7-8
Four 10+ 9 -10
Fi e 11+
Chits for Grande Armee. (Photocopy, dry-mount to cardboard, and cut out.)

CP CP CP CP CP CP CP CP Inactive Inactive
CP CP CP CP CP CP CP CP Inactive Inactive
CP CP CP CP CP CP CP CP Inactive Inactive
CP CP CP CP CP CP CP CP Inactive Inactive
CP CP CP CP CP CP CP CP Inactive Inactive
CP CP CP CP CP CP CP CP Adjust Adjust
CP CP CP CP CP CP CP CP Adjust Adjust
CP CP CP CP CP CP CP CP Adjust Adjust
CP CP CP CP CP CP CP CP Adjust Adjust
CP CP CP CP CP CP CP CP Attack! Attack!
CP CP CP CP CP CP CP CP Attack! Attack!
CP CP CP CP CP CP CP CP Attack! Attack!
CP CP CP CP CP CP CP CP Attack! Attack!
CP CP CP CP CP CP CP CP
CP CP CP CP CP CP CP CP
CP CP CP CP CP CP CP CP
 If you want to know Dlore
about the Napoleonic Wars-
Contact the experts!
The largest range of
Napoleonic books and rules
available
Not just Napoleonic
......English Civil Wars, World Wars, Ancient,
Medieval, Colonial plus Boardgames,
Trading Card Games, Roleplaying Games,
Fiction & more

stock holding shop ,.

over 12,000+ items on the shelf
Including a
vast selection of lDiniaturesl
Our shop open 7 days a week / 364 days a year
816- 818 London Road. Leigh- on- sea. Essex. SS9 3NH. UK
Phone / Fax: +44 (0) 1702 473986
Email: enquiries@caliverbooks.com
For paper catalogue send US 5 in bills. Please state interests.

.calivcrb .c m
 Grande AM1lee Charts and Tables
Each Turn: Weather Visibility
A. Weathe r Variation (skip this on thejirst turn) Sunny 24"
B. Comma nd Phase Normal 20"
1. Any lightly wounded officers might return to their duties Ove rcast 16"
2. Both players roll for command points (CPs) Precipita ting 12"
3. Roll to determine initiative for the first pulse
c. Pulses:
1. Simultaneou kirmishing
2. Simultaneous artillery fire
3. First Side Phasing
a) Control Segment: I ue command and/or take control te ts Force Status
b) Movement Segment: Move units
c) Combat Segment: Resolve combats
Roll Status
s6 Inactive Modifier
4. Second Side Phasing: repeat segments a-b-c, as above. +3 Aggressive
5. Remove suppression from artillery units 7-9 Adjust -1 Visible enemies
6. Roll initiative for next pul e, return to C. Or, if turn ends, go to D. 10+ Attack! only cav & arty.
D. imultaneou Rally Segme nt: -2 Cautious
1. Attempt to recover 10 t SPs
2. Attempt to rally broken units
Anothe r Turn?

The Artillery Chart

Gun Size To Hit # / Range
Heavy (9-12 Ibs) 2-6 6" 4-6 10" 5-6 16"
Medium (6 -Blbs) 3-6 4" 5-6 12"
Light (3-4 Ibs) 3-6 3" 6 9"

Saving Throws Again t Artillery Fire:

2 Soft Cover
Movement Allowances 4 Hard Cover
2 Target is artillery or engineer
Type Base Move Plu
Different elevation
Foot Artillery and Fast Infantry 6 1 die 3 Ground is Mud
Slow Infantry 4 1 die 2 Ground is Soft
Light Cavalry 10 1 die
Final Shot": Against an attacker to the
Horse Artillery and Heavy Cavalry 8 1 die front: Hits infantry on 4-6 and cavalry on 5-
Officer.s (3CPs to move the commander) 18 6. No saving throws.

Command Table
The Terrain Table
Cost of
Type Rough Obstacle
Infantry 2-3 1-2 Great 40 45 50 55 6.0 65 70
Cavalry 3-4 2-3 Good 30 35 40 45 50 55 6.0
Artillery 3-4 3-4 Average 30 30 35 35 40 45 50
Officers 1-2 1-2 Poor 30 30 30 35 35 40 45

Grande Armee is a registered trademark for the game of the great battles of the Napoleonic Wars in miniature. Copyright 2002. all Rights Reserved.
 Grande AMltee Charts and Tables
Cavalry Evades Artillery Escape
Each side rolls one die, with defender's roll modified: Attacker
-1 if defender is heavy and attacker is light. Defender Infantry HvyCav. LtCav.
+1 if defender is light cavalry and attacker is heavy. Ft. Artillery 3 2 1
+2 if defender i Co ack, against any attacker Hs. Artillery 4 3 2
Modifiers to Die Roll:
+ 1 in Mud, Snow, or Rain

..Combat Die Modifiers

Bonus die for a MX brigade (14 .2), or for a (V) officer.
Infantry and cavalry normally hit on 4-6. Artillery hit
+ 1 Artillery in rough terrain
-1 Artillery behind an obstacle (such as a wall or ditch)

only on 6. Subtract one pip from each die for :

-1 Vulnerable "Attached" Officers
-1 Flanked (An officer may do one of each of these per pulse)
-1 vs. Combined Arms
-1 Outside radiu of ub-commander Re-roll a movement die for a unit within 3"
-1 Infantry attaf!king cavalry Re-roll a terrain table die for a unit within 3"
If he has a (V)alor bonus, he may give a Bonus
die to. one friendly unit in combat. (Thi expo e
him to an officer casualty check (J5.0)).

Saving Throws in Co~bat

1 Infantry or artillery on higher elevation Officer Casualty
2 Cavalry saving vs. infantry in the rain Within 1" of a unit that was uccessfully SK-
2 Heavy cavalry aving vs. hits cored by attacked.
light cavalry When he u ed his (V) to influence a combat.
2 Protected by Soft Cover. When an enemy unit moves through him.
4 Protected by Hard Cover. When within 1" of a unit that Breaks.
Roll two dice. A normal officer has fallen on a roll of
Save Number i never greater than 5. 11+(an officer with the (V)alor bonus falls on a roll
of 10+.) If the officer has fallen, roll another d6:
1-2 Lightly Wounded
3-4 Badly Wounded
5-6 Killed in Action
The Rally Factor
... one die plus:
6 Guard
5 Elite SP Recovery Table
4 Veteran
3 Trained
2 Con cript
1 Raw None 0-6 0-4 0-3 0-2 0-1
One 7+ 5-'7 4-6 3-5 2-4
-2 for each circled "R" marked on
Two 8+ 7-8 6-7 5-6
the unit's roster, showing a previ-
ous rally. Three 9+ 8-9 7-8
+? for CPs spent by the army com- Four 10+ 9-10
mander for this unit' rally factor Five 11+

Grande Annee is a registered trademark for the game of the great battles of the Napoleonic Wars In miniature. Copyright 2002. all Rights Reserved .
 ARTIZAN DESIG S by Mike Owen
WWII (North Africa, Normandy Range with Crusader)

CRUSADER iniatur by Mark Sims

WWII (Western Front, Normandy Range with Artizan),
Seven Years War, Norman ,Fanta y

R
WWI, English Civil War, Celts, American Civil War, Fanta y

BLACK TREE DESIGN

WWII, Zulu Wars, Ancients, Dark Age ,Animal ,Select Fanta y

North Star Figures

WWII (1/48), Projekt X
Brigade Games Miniatures
VSF Miniature exclusively By Brigade Games
Union Jet Pack Infantry, Confederate Fire-Riflemen, Demolitionists,
ACW zouave women, Steam Rifle Sharpshooters, Iron Brigade,
NavaVAirship Crews, Vehicles, Tanks and customization parts, and morel

Brigade Games WWI Historical Miniatures coming soon

Strategia e Tattica (North American Distr)

Italian Colonial Wars, WWII Italians, 54mm Romans
Eureka (Australia) - Pax Limpopo, Historicals, 100 and 300 Club,
AND YES WE HA VE TEDDY BEARS!
Castaway Arts (Australia) - Colonials, Franco-Prussian War
Bill's Bases, Shadowforge, Jeff Valent
Rules-Gaslight, ACW by Gaslight, Big Battles for Little Hands, Fire Team
Vietnam, Arc of Fire, Grand Armee , Warhammer Historical Rules, more

BRIGADE GAMES Be HOBBY SUPPLY

35 Brookvale Road, Kinnelon, Nl 07405
Ph/fax: (973) 492-0347 (please leave m gel
http://www.brigadegames.com
For best response, please use email : brigadegames@yahoo.com
No time scale: Games have variable number of turn , each turn ha a variable length, and the
total length of the game i unpredictable.
No figure cale: Any ize figure will work, any number of figures can be mounted on the ba es,
and no re-ba ing i required if you already have a different system.
Weather is a crucial factor in all your deci ions, not an optional add-on at the end. What can you
ee? What i the condition of the ground? Can you really fight thi battle the way you want to?
Variable Movement: You only know roughly how fast your unit will move each turn. And once
your units get in cIo e with the enemy, they may not do a you plea e.
No Written Order : U ing the Command Point (CP) chit, you make deci ion about the control
of your force. Tho e which aren't controlled might not behave a you wi h.
No Morale Checks: The ' trength' of unit waxe and wane, ba ed on your deci ion , their
morale, and forces beyond your control.
Army Morale and Pur uit: Con erve your cavalry for a pur uit or to cover your retreat. In mo t
games there' "no tomorrow," but in Grande Armee you have to make deci ions about whether or
not to ri k committing your re erve . You might win the day, but the enemy get away becau e of his
cavalry creen, or darkne , or bad weather, or ....
Four r eady-to-play scenarios , complete with hi torical background and optional "what-if ":
Friedland, Aspern-E ling, Fuentes de Onoro, and Waterloo.
Do-it-Your elf cenario de ign in tructions enable you to create Gmnde Armee battle
hi torical orders of battle or even other game .

150,ool